JP6943437B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention performs based-out Gate arm to establishment of a predetermined condition, of possible gaming machine generates a special game state if the result of this該Ge over arm became special results.

A gaming machine having a transparent gaming board in which a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down and a launching ball guide passage for guiding a gaming ball launched by a launching device to the gaming area are formed. There is known a gaming machine provided with a variable display device for variable display of a plurality of identification information on the back surface side of the game board (see, for example, Patent Document 1). That is, there is known a type of gaming machine in which the display unit (display screen) of the variable display device is visually recognized through a transparent gaming board.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-344737

An object of the present invention is to ensure the visibility of a game medium.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result.
A display means having a display unit and
A flow-down area where a game ball located in front of the display unit can flow down is provided.
Wherein the display unit predetermined viewable of it through a falling region, have lower than a predetermined value visually capable of gaming balls of the falling region, display is difficult lightness viewing of a game ball of the falling region At the same time, a part of the predetermined display unit has a value higher than the predetermined value, lower than a specific value in which it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball in the flow area, and equal to or higher than the predetermined value. It is characterized by displaying the color of lightness.
Further, the invention according to claim 2 is
In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result.
A display means having a display unit and
A flow-down area where a game ball located in front of the display unit can flow down is provided.
A specific value or more that makes it difficult to visually recognize the game ball in the flow area, which is higher than a predetermined value in which the game ball in the flow area can be visually recognized on the predetermined display unit that can be visually recognized through the flow area. performs the display of the brightness of a part of the predetermined display section, lower than the specific value, and wherein the display color of the predetermined value or more brightness.

According to the present invention, it is placed on maintaining the visibility of the game medium.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value confirmation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 variation start process, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 variation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process in the middle of a normal drawing. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of the probability setting value. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the determination condition monitoring process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the transition determination process in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability setting value in 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the setting means and the game control device in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value confirmation process in the 6th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation processing in the 9th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation processing in the tenth modification. It is a figure explaining the notification mode in eleventh modification. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining the modification of the suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining the modification A of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of the main processing in an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the assist symbol control process. It is a flowchart explaining the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the effect replacement process. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification C of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification C of the game board. It is a flowchart explaining the replay control process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a figure explaining the 1st example of the game ball look-ahead effect. It is a figure explaining the 2nd example of the game ball look-ahead effect. It is a figure explaining the 3rd example of the game ball look-ahead effect. It is a figure explaining the game ball storage device. It is a figure explaining the start winning unit. It is a figure explaining the start winning unit. It is a figure explaining the modification of the out zone unit. It is a figure explaining the modification of the out zone unit. It is a figure explaining an example of the game which triggered the pseudo prize. It is a figure explaining an example of the game which triggered the pseudo prize. It is a figure explaining the modification D of the game board. It is a figure explaining the real ball notification production. It is a figure explaining the real ball notification production. It is a figure explaining the real ball notification production. It is a figure explaining the modification of the real ball notification effect. It is a figure explaining the modification of the real ball notification effect.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are arranged. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game ball paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation handle 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the hitting ball launching device directs the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left and right parts of the center case 40, a board effect device 44, which is a movable effect device for producing a game including a special figure variation display game, is provided by an operating movable effect member. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, in the lower left of the center case 40, a sub that displays the fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variation display game separately from the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the start memory number. An information display device 90 is provided.

The sub-information display device 90 is a first light emitting unit composed of a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game. A second sub composed of a sub-game display unit 91 and a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit that displays a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. It includes a game display unit 92. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game by the two light emitting units, and the second special figure variation display game are executed by the two light emitting units. A second sub-display unit 94 indicating the number of second start-up memories, which is the right to play, is provided.

In the first sub-game display unit 91 and the second sub-game display unit 92, the light emitting unit turns off, blinks, and lights a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the variation display and a display indicating the result. Can be displayed by. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 turn off the two light emitting units, respectively, for the number of the first start memory (holding the special figure 1) and the second start memory (holding the special figure 2). It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

By providing the sub-information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the display area of the display device 41 is not occupied by displaying the fourth symbol on the display device 41, and the display area is effectively utilized. be able to. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operating range of the board effect device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operating the board effect device 44. ..

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate 34 (normal figure start gate, start area, inflow area) that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
Further, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal drawing start gate 34. The mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a start condition of the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a start condition of the second special figure variation display game is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easily opened by the normal variable winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may win a prize in the closed state rather than in the open state.
Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.
The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The big winning opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and is provided in a special gaming state or a small hit game. During the state, the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). It has become. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball flowing into the large winning opening is detected by any of the large winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of large winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming ball flows down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to aim for a prize in the start winning opening 36, and launches the game ball to the right game area (so-called left-handed). By hitting right), it is possible to aim for a prize in the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right gaming region, and is launched into the right gaming region. The resulting game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display unit (normal figure display) 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game composed of the LED lamp, and the same LED lamp. It is provided with storage display units 54, 55, and 56 for notifying the starting memory number of each variable display game composed of.
Further, the batch display device 50 has a first game state display unit (first game state display, right-handed notification unit) 57 for notifying that right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. When a state occurs, the second game state display unit (second game state display, time reduction state notification unit) 58 that lights up to notify the occurrence of a time saving state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state. A third game status display unit (third game status display, probability status display unit) 59 that displays the fact that the game has been set, and a round display unit 60 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed). Is provided.
The batch display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs to notify the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven to fluctuate. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
Then, when the result of the game is "missing", for example, the central segment is turned on as the result mode of the loss, and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode of the hit (special result mode) is out of order. The game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode.

The normal figure display 53 blinks the lamp during the fluctuation to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the result of the game. Further, the normal figure hold indicator 56 displays the start memory number (= hold number) of the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 53, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 sets the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, with a plurality of LEDs. Displayed by turning off, blinking, and turning on. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 sets the number of start storages (= number of holds) of the second start winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, by turning off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting.

The first game status display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the lamp is turned off when the left-handed player is in a more advantageous game state than the right-handed player (normal hitting). When the game state is such that right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed (when right-handed), the lamp is turned on.

The second game status display unit (time reduction status notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the lamp is turned off in the normal game state (when the fluctuation time reduction function is not activated) in which the time reduction state does not occur. When the time saving state occurs (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and when the probability state of the jackpot is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned off. If the probability state of the jackpot is a high probability state (probability change state) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not in progress, the lamp is turned off, and in the special game state, a lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed. Turn it on. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a voltage of DC32V. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. A control signal generation unit 430 or the like that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal is provided.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a backup storage means capable of holding the stored data even when the power is cut off. Then, when the power is restored, the control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where the display is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state that has become the identification information, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variablely displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display without reach and reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. A variable pattern table is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables based on the state), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state, the number of start memories, and the like. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and so on. It is connected to the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 in the starting gate 34, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is negative such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided, which receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. .. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, the third input port 124 is changed to a set value that serves as a detection means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting a probability set value to which a probability value that is a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of values. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operation unit that forms the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit is provided with a key hole for inserting the setting key, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it turns off.

The set value change switch 151 detects the operation of the set value change button that forms the second operation unit of the operation units. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed, and is turned off when the set value change button is not pressed.

By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is a game. It is supposed to be used. Here, six settings 1 to 6 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability values assigned to each probability setting value are 1/320 for setting 1, 1/310 for setting 2, 1/300 for setting 3, 1/290 for setting 4, 1/280 for setting 5, and setting 6 for setting 6. It is said to be 1/270. This probability value is a probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and then the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. The probability setting value can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value change button in this probability setting value change state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

Further, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is pressed. When it is turned to the second position, the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed in the probability setting value confirmation mode.

The probability set value display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value by a number of 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like. Further, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability set value information may be displayed by using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. In this case, the information of the probability setting value is displayed while the operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), and other than that, the calculated base value and accessory ratio are displayed. Give priority to display.

In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153, and the like, and the probability value used by the game control device 100 for the lottery of the special figure variation display game. Is used as a setting means that allows the assigned probability setting value to be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by the operation of the operation unit. The function of the setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, the setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, the operation signals of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability setting value in the game control device 100, or the setting sub-board side may change the probability setting value. The probability setting value may be changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152, and the determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24). (Based signal), out-ball detection switch signal (signal based on detection by the out-switch that detects all game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game), and the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. A first input port 122 is provided.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting the opening / closing data of the above is provided. Further, the second output port 134 outputs the display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, amusement hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting display data of the probability setting value display device 153 that displays the selected probability setting value.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. A fifth driver 138e is provided to receive the display data output from the second output port 134 and display it on the status display device 160.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is used to display images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 are a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for this is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and a sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including a center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. The glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and the movable effect member that operates forms a movable effect device that produces a game including a special figure variation display game. An effect device may be provided, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided to detect the above and input the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC-DC for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPSET signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and control circuits 332-334 (IORESET) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38 is won, or the game flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost part of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of winning winning opening is the payout control device 200 ( From the payout unit controlled by (see FIG. 3), the glass frame 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the game area 32 When the game ball driven inside passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start memories is an upper limit number (for example, 4) based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), the number of normal figure start memories is added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored in ROM 111B. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the general drawing holding display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory of starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process of executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed. In addition, the general figure display 53 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the figures in a predetermined time variation, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. It may be configured.

If the result of the solenoid variable display game is a hit, a lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol that has a special result mode is displayed on the solenoid display 53 according to the type of hit. Along with displaying the stop, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display 53 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the deviation.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition to storing, the second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the number of stored start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 of the batch display device 50, and the decorative special figure start memory is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as a display. It is also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

Then, when the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 is in a state where the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game can be started, it is stored in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The jackpot determination random value is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B and set according to the probability setting value, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the first special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 1 changing display, the process of displaying the first special figure changing display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Further, when executing the second special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, the process of displaying the second special figure changing display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) corresponds to the special figure fluctuation display game, and a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, characters) Displaying a variable display of a decorative special figure variable display (design, etc.) Performs processing to display a game. Further, the sub-game display unit of the sub-information display device 90 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game that changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit in response to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41, for example, in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol) and the right variable display area (1st special symbol). In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed at which it is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. Further, in the display device 41, various effects such as the appearance of characters are displayed in order to improve the interest.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. In addition to displaying the lighting pattern, processing is performed to generate a special game state or a small hit game state. In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

In the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and the game is entered into the large winning opening. Controls to allow the inflow of balls. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. Is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the 1st special figure fluctuation display game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation display game, the 1st special figure fluctuation display game and the 2nd special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state of normal drawing, second operation state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. It has become. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state. That is, the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be controlled by either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state. ..

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, Opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms x 2), opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2) of the third stop symbol 3 times), it is possible to set.

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power opening number, and the normal power opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to set the probability (normally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variable display may be displayed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices and different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, if there is a memory of starting the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is played. It is designed to be executed (priority is executed). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game is provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the game ball utilizes the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) for detecting a magnetic detector is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

The signal from the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 and the signal from the main body frame opening detection switch are input to the third input port 124, and the third input port 124 is set before the start of the standby time. By reading the state of the input port 124, the state of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 at the time of turning on the power and the open state of the front frame 12 (main body frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an open / close detecting means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front frame 12. As described above, when the power is turned on with the front frame 12 open and the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value can be changed in the probability setting value change state. It becomes. Further, when the power is turned on while the setting value change button is pressed without turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, the RAM 111C is cleared (initialized). ing. Since the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, the front frame 12 is required to be opened.

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the set value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue operating the set value change button from the power-on until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power is not accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). When the timer value is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16), and if it is normal (step S16; Y), the power failure in the RWM. It is determined whether the value of the inspection area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy determining means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on. When the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S21). When the probability setting value is changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set.

In the case of the probability set value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the RAM initialization process and the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed are performed. Here, it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is cut off during the probability setting value change state and the RAM data is normally backed up. In this case, the probability setting is set again. The value is changed. Further, when the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, an area for a probability setting value, an area for an initial value random number, an area for a variation pattern random number, an area for a game control, and an area for displaying a state are set in order from the beginning. In the area for the probability setting value, a probability setting value area for storing the information of the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. Will be done. This work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. In addition, the large hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number, which are updated at any time, are stored in the area for the initial value random number. Further, the variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 that are updated at any time are stored in the variable pattern random number area. Further, in the game control area, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored and a stack area are set. Further, in the work area for displaying the status, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying the base value, the accessory ratio, and the like, and a stack area are set.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the number of payouts based on the winning in the winning area. The information to be calculated and required to display the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected by the outswitch and information on the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the bonus ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the prize opening from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present, during the jackpot state (that is, fanfare and ending). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by character) obtained by winning the big prize opening (excluding the inside) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information necessary to display the character ratio. Includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by character).

The RAM clear start address 2 is the start address of the area for the initial value random number, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the area for the variable pattern random number The area for game control will be cleared. The area for initial value random numbers and the area for variable pattern random numbers may not be included in the clear target. Further, the RAM clear start address 1 described later is the start address of the area for the probability setting value, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number Area, area for variable pattern random numbers, and area for game control (work area and stack area) will be cleared. Further, the RAM clear start address 3 described later is the start address of the game control area, and the game control area is cleared by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set. Become.

The status display area is initialized when it is abnormal in the status display edit output processing in the timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 set in the case is set, the area for displaying the state may also be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the entire area of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. One or more of the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, the area for the game control, and the area for displaying the state may be targeted. When targeting a plurality of areas, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the validity may be judged individually, or the checksums of each area may be added up to determine the correctness. It may be judged collectively.

When the main body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the RAM initialization process and the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed are performed. If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N) or the main body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and the state of the third input port 124 read earlier It is determined from (step S24) whether the set value change switch is in the ON state.

If the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S30, and processing is performed when the power failure is normally restored. When the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41 to initialize the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area. Perform processing. That is, the set value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 has data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. It serves as an initialization means for initializing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S16; N or step S17; N), and when it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S19; N), step S25. And the process of initializing all the RAM areas is performed. That is, the RAM area for the probability setting value and the RAM area for the status display are initialized only when a RAM abnormality occurs. Further, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control are not only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). When the main body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. As will be described later, in steps S35 and S36, the RAM is initialized. In this case, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number are used. Area, the area for variable pattern random numbers, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

Further, when the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S27; N) or when the main body frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), a command (specific information) for instructing the setting change is issued to the effect control board (effect control device). It is transmitted to (300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and the power of the gaming machine is shut off. The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and operates the board effect device 44 based on receiving the command for changing the setting. , The sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b is used to notify the user to change the probability set value. This notification continues until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this case, if the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the front frame 12 is opened, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, and the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. It is determined that the switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), and the process proceeds to step S35 to perform a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. When the control is stopped in step S29, the front frame 12 is not opened after the power of the gaming machine is cut off, or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the RAM data remains abnormal and the probability setting value cannot be changed to the changed state, so that the processes of steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

Although the notification is performed by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may perform the notification. For example, the batch display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100 may be used for notification, and the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be used to perform a display that is not used as identification information. Alternatively, a display for notifying an abnormality may be provided.

As a process when the power is normally restored from the power failure, in step S30 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S31).

Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S31; N), steps S32 and S33 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S34. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S31; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is provided. On (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S33).

Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. Proceed to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability set value information which is the information of the selected probability set value, and the screen designation Send multiple commands such as commands (for example, a customer waiting demo command when waiting for customers, and a recovery screen command in other cases). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

The screen specification command sends a command according to the state of the restarted game. When resuming the special figure fluctuation display game that was interrupted by power cutoff due to the resumption of control, a recovery screen command that provides recovery information is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, in this case, information regarding the result of the special figure variation display game to be restarted is also transmitted. In addition, when the power is cut off during the customer waiting state and the control is resumed in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen designation command. Further, when resuming the special game state interrupted by power interruption due to the resumption of control, a special game state resumption command is transmitted as a screen designation command.

Further, in step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared should be cleared to 0 (step S35) and initialized as the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area (step S36). Here, when the backed up information is normal and the game is migrated from step S21 or S23, the RAM clear start address 2 is set, so that the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the game control are used. The RAM area (work area and stack area) of is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number.

On the other hand, when the backed up information is abnormal and the process is migrated from step S27, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, and the area for the variable pattern random number are set. And the area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared and the initial value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

Further, the area to be initialized is an area in which a value other than 0 is desired to be set in the area cleared to 0, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value is set to 1 by setting 0 in the area for the probability setting value. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability, it is possible to minimize the damage to the amusement store even if the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or cheating. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, the probability setting value changing flag is set as a process of setting the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed (step S37). As a result, the probability set value is changed. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, the information of the probability set value currently set in the probability set value display device 153 can be displayed.

Then, the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). , Step S45. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and displays the board effect device 44. Notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is performed by the operation, the output of the sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. Although the RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. In addition, settings for outputting a security signal are also made. In this case, a timer may be set so that the security signal is output for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period in which the probability set value is changed. Further, since the RAM has not been initialized yet, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be made.

Further, as the process of initializing the RAM area for game control, in step S41 of FIG. 6, the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the game is initialized. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the power area (step S43). As a result, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S44, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability set value information which is the information of the selected probability set value, and the RAM initial A plurality of commands such as a conversion command (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

In step S45, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). (Big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (win symbol random number)) as the initial value (start value) of RWM After saving in the area (step S47), the interrupt is permitted (step S48). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variation display. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol of the game. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the hit stop symbol of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which the random number of the initial value of the winning symbol does not exist.

Further, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing, which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value change method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S49, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S50), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S49) (step S48), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S49, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which causes the main processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S52; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S53), all. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S58) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S59). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) capable of being operated from the outside, and an initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time. It becomes.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

In the above main process, after the process of step S28 is performed, the process may be returned to the process of step S26, and the processes of steps S26 to S28 may be repeated until the setting key switch is turned on. .. That is, the control of the game may be stopped and the setting key switch may be turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124, not the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, if the state of repeating the processes of steps S26 to S28 continues for a certain period of time, the process may proceed to step S29 and wait for the power to be cut off.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state. The open state of the frame 12 does not have to be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition.

Further, the probability setting value change state may be entered only on the condition that the setting value change switch is in the ON state without providing the setting key switch. That is, if the process of steps S22 and S23 is not performed and the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 (step S24; Y), the process may proceed to step S35 of FIG. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 of FIG. 6 for initializing the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for the game control is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. It is possible to initialize only the area for initial value random numbers, the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control by ending without or by setting the same probability setting value. By shifting to the probability set value change state only on the condition that the set value change switch is in the ON state in this way, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be diverted.

From the above, in a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special game state that gives the player a game value is generated when the result of the game is a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the setting value change button (setting value). The control means includes a setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)), and the control means is a storage means (RAM 111C) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is cut off. ), The validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability set value. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the above, and when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the probability is set. This means that a notification prompting the selection of a value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state. Further, when the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but it is initialized by performing a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value. It is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set.

Further, the control means is configured so that the probability set value can be selected when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means is stored by the validity determination means. If it is determined that the value is not valid, the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is continued until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set by the initialization.

Further, when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for the selection of the probability set value. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set by the initialization.

Further, the game control means includes a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means. When the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means uses the specific information. This means that the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed based on the reception of. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set by the initialization.

Further, when the effect control means receives the specific information, the effect control means continues the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set by the initialization.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the control means can retain the stored contents even when the power is cut off. If the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, the first operation unit and the second operation unit are restored based on the information stored in the storage means, and when the power is turned on, the first operation unit and the second operation unit are restored. 1 When the operation unit is operated, the probability set value can be changed by the setting means, and when only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, the storage means is initially set. It means that it was made to become. Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, the operation of selecting the probability setting value and the operation of selecting the initialization can be performed using the same operation unit, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

Further, the control means includes a legitimacy determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on, and is stored in the storage means by the legitimacy determination means. When it is determined that the information provided is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, a notification prompting the initialization of the storage means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state.

Further, the control means is configured to be in a changeable state in which the probability set value can be changed by the setting means and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, the first operation unit is operated. This means that a notification prompting the user to turn on the power is given. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are assigned to a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change)). Necessary for controlling the game by the setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the switch 151)) and the control means including the information of the probability set values selected by the setting means. A storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information is provided, and the control means initially initializes the storage means when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while a predetermined operation unit is operated among the plurality of operation units. It means that it was made to become. Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, the output process (step S104) for performing the drive control of the actuator such as the solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the random number update process 1 (step S105) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process, the special figure. 1. Random number update process 2 (step S106) for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Special Figure 2 is performed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and monitoring of errors ( Performs the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.).

Next, the probability setting value change process (step S108) for changing and confirming the probability set value is performed, and it is determined whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S109). When the probability setting value is changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S109; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S110). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as a process related to the progress of the game, a payout command transmission process (step S111) that outputs a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, specially The special figure game process (step S112) for performing the process related to the figure variation display game and the normal figure game process (step S113) for performing the process related to the normal figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, in the case where the probability set value is changed (step S109; Y) or the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above processing related to the game. That is, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot proceed.

In addition, in the case of the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the payout command transmission process (step S111), the special figure game process (step S112), and the normal figure game process (step S113) should not be performed. However, one or more of these may be performed. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed so that the prize balls are paid out. Further, a process other than the above-described process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, the random number update process 1 (step S105) and the random number update process 2 (step S106) should not be performed in the probability set value change state, and the random number should not be updated in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. You can do it. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S114), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115) that checks the detection signal from the LED and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step S116) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S117) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and a base value is obtained from the number of game balls detected by the outswitch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. The status display edit output process is performed (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 that outputs the data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c is synthesized and output (step S142).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step). S144). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame opening" data, "security signal" data) is an output port for digit / external information output. Output to 136 (step S146).

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). As a result, a plurality of light emitting display units provided in the batch display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (for example, "big hit signal 1" data, "big hit signal 2" data, "big hit signal 3" data, and "big hit signal" are combined. 4 ”data,“ symbol confirmation count signal ”data,“ start port signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and launch permission output data are combined (step S150), and the combined data is combined. It outputs to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / launch permission signal (step S151).

Next, the off output data of the probability set value display is set as the display content in the probability set value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether or not the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability set value display permission flag is a flag set when the probability set value display device 153 is permitted to display the probability set value.

When this probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154), and the display data is output as the probability setting value display. Output to port 134 (step S155). As a result, the probability set value display device 153 is displayed with respect to the probability set value. On the other hand, when the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 of the probability set value display (step S155). In this case, the off-output data set in step S152 is set, and nothing is displayed on the probability set value display device 153.

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S158). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability set value display data is loaded as the test signal output data from the probability set value display data area. That is, as for the information regarding the probability set value among the test signals to the test firing device, the display data of the probability set value display device 153 is used as it is. This simplifies the processing and makes it possible to output accurate information without changing the information of the probability set value. Of course, the display data may be converted into value information and output.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S162), and if it is not in the ON state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is in the ON state (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. After that, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus (step S164), and the output process is completed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and is a prize for which the payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information related to the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is divided into prize ball number counter areas (3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls in the case of this embodiment) set for each prize opening. Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted signals are sent. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 prizes can be stored in each of the 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1. , The 3 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area are configured to store up to 255 prizes, respectively.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, the winning number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the prize number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determine (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S187). As the value of the prize ball remaining number region before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. When it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output number region is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processes of steps S181 to S191 are processes of updating (increasing) the number of output times of the main prize ball signal, and the processes of steps S192 to S201 are processes of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control, and if the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Will be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. It is configured to send a payout command when it is in a state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The conditions for turning on the payout busy signal (busy state) are, for example, during the payout operation, during the ball lending operation, during the shoot ball out error, during the overflow error, during the frame radio wave fraud, and the payout ball detection switch (payout). Counting the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of acquired game balls) during an abnormality of the switch that monitors the balls ) Is present (when it is not 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, the winning number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not.

Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determine (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. Acquire the payout number command corresponding to the address of (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is completed. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function to do so.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, which has a problem of increasing the cost. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the game ball to the winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38) provided in the game area 32. A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the prize, and a payout control means (payout control device) that controls the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. 200), and the game control means issues a prize ball command based on a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control, which is output from the payout control means. When a power failure occurs and the player recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without transmitting to the payout control means. You are trying to do it.

Further, a plurality of winning areas (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38) having different numbers of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, and the game control means (game control device 100) is provided. A prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can specify whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted is provided for each number of prize balls, and a status signal can start payout control. When there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal is sent by the payout control means. Whether or not the payout control can be started is specified before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command.

In addition, the game is controlled in a comprehensive manner, and a prize ball command is issued based on the winning of the game ball in a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38). The game is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting the game and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The control means issues a prize ball command when the status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) to be transmitted to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area. The external information output means (game control device 100) is provided, and the external information output means can start the payout control by the state signal output from the payout control means. It means that the prize ball signal is output regardless of the presence or absence.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the status signal can start the payout control when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation). A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the prize device 38), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, one prize ball command is issued by the payout control means (payout control device 200). ), The prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and the game to the predetermined winning area. By updating when the ball wins and updating in correspondence with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored, and the external information output means can be used. The number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball to the predetermined prize area is accumulated, and the prize ball signal is output to the outside of the game machine each time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number, and the prize is awarded. The ball signal counter can store the winning information in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, updates the winning ball when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, and the prize ball by the external information output means. By updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not been cumulatively processed yet.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. It is configured so that the main prize ball signal is output each time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 payout schedules (every time a payout command is transmitted). The main prize ball signal is output for the set number of outputs.
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the payout control device 200 transmits a prize ball signal every time 10 payouts are actually made, so that the schedule and the result can be matched. It is possible to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, even if the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc., and the payout is made after the big hit, the hall controller (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judgment).

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 10 shows a winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is in the changed state (step S299). When the probability setting value is changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S299; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S300). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the processes after step S301 are performed as the processes related to the progress of the game. On the other hand, when the probability set value is changed (step S299; Y) or the probability set value confirmation mode is set (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot proceed without processing related to winning.

In the case of the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the special variable winning device 38 is monitored for fraud and winning, the normal variable winning device 37 is monitored for fraud and winning, and the winning opening is always available for winning. The winnings are not monitored, but one or more of these may be monitored. For example, the special variable winning device 38 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be monitored for fraud. Further, a process other than the above-described process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

In step S301, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the large winning opening is large even though the large winning opening is not open. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraudulent monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, a fraudulent winning error notification command, and a fraudulent winning Information on the upper limit of the number (number of fraud occurrence judgments), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. Further, in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, in addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are displayed for each switch. Information on the lower address of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning opening is not open even though the large winning opening is not open. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S304) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal prize in the mouth and detecting a normal prize is executed.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden (step S305), and monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the Fuden even though the Fuden is not open. At the same time, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S306) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table of a winning opening switch (for example, starting opening 1 switch 36a and winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win is prepared (step S307), and the winning number counter is updated to update the number of winnings. The process (step S308) is performed.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches for monitoring the status and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 1, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to a disconnection of the switch connector or the like. The state monitoring based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", the state monitoring based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. NS.

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the monitoring status according to the value of the status scan counter is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the game machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch 63. The status monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "1", the status monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave invalid signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines the status such as whether an error has occurred. The state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 3, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. 2 Signal-based condition monitoring is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is from "1" to "3".

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. Since the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Probability setting value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows a probability set value change process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this probability setting value change process, first, it is determined whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S401), and if it is not in the probability set value changed state (step S401; N), the probability set value can be confirmed. The probability set value confirmation process is performed (step S422), and the probability set value change process is terminated.

Further, in the case where the probability setting value is changed (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, the probability setting value extinguishing timer is updated by -1 (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0. .. When the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability set value information is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output process (see FIG. 8) described above. If the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0 (step S403; N), the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability set value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output process described above.

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability set value has been changed (step S405). The probability setting value changed means that the probability setting value used in the game is newly set by performing the confirmation operation described later, and in this case, the probability setting value changed flag is set. If the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability set value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406).

Then, in the determination of whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether or not the input state from the set value change switch has changed to the on state. That is, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value change button is pressed. If there is no input from the set value change switch (step S406; N), the process proceeds to step S411.

When there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406; Y), the value in the work probability set value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5. The values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively, and the value in the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. , The selected probability setting value will change sequentially. In addition, when the value of the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the state of 5, it returns to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the probability setting value area for work is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value used for the game does not change. The probability setting value selected based on the confirmation operation described later is saved in the probability setting value area. Further, although the number of probability setting values is set to 6 here, it is possible to set the number to any other value.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). As a result, the data displayed on the probability set value display device 153 becomes the information of the newly selected probability set value. Then, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value extinguishing timer area (step S409), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). As a result, as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is turned off and a blank display is performed in which nothing is displayed, and then new probability setting value information is displayed. Will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated.

Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as a specific display, but other displays may be used. For example, when the probability setting value is displayed by numbers 1 to 6, a display other than these numbers may be used as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as a display of the probability set value. Further, when the display of the probability set value is displayed in a continuous lighting state, the display of the updated probability set value may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the lapse of the specific display. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a blinking display mode, a display mode in which the blinking cycle is different from that in the non-specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from the non-specific display. ..

Further, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the LED light emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44. The specific notification, which is the notification that the selected probability setting value has been changed, may be performed by the operation of the above, the output of the voice by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. That is, the specific notification may be performed together with the specific display or instead of the specific display. Further, the display device 41, the special figure 1 display 51, and the special figure 2 display may be displayed in the same manner as the probability set value display device 153.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411). The touch switch is a sensor capable of detecting the contact of the human body with the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is contact. When there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value change process ends. When there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). As a result, the selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value used for the game. That is, touching the operation handle 24 is a confirmation operation for determining the selected probability setting value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be a confirmation operation, and an operation unit for the confirmation operation may be provided in the setting means.

After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S414), a command for changing the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S415), and the probability setting value change process is completed. .. Based on receiving the command to change the probability set value, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and displays the board effect device 44. It notifies that the probability set value has been changed by the operation, the output of the sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like.

On the other hand, when the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). When the setting key switch is not off (step S416; N), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position, the probability setting value change process is terminated. When the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, the RAM clear start address 3 is set (step S417), and the clear target is set. The RAM area of is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S419).

As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, the area for initial value random numbers and the area for variable pattern random numbers may be cleared. In addition, the area related to the change work, such as the probability setting value area for work that temporarily stores the information of the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state and various flags in the area for the probability setting value, is cleared. NS. Therefore, since the probability set value display permission flag is cleared, the display on the probability set value display device 153 ends. In addition, since the flag for changing the probability setting value is cleared, the probability setting value change state ends.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and the command for completing the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) ( Step S421), the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. Based on receiving the command to change the probability set value, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and displays the board effect device 44. It notifies that the change of the probability set value is completed by the operation, the output of the sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the probability setting A plurality of commands such as a command for ending the change (a command for displaying the customer waiting demo screen and notifying the RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

From the above, in a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special game state that gives a game value to the player is generated when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. Probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery are assigned are set to multiple types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from the above is provided, and the setting means includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value, based on the operation of the operation unit. When the display of the display unit is updated due to the selection operation of the probability set value, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the setting means is configured to display a display that is not used as a display of information on the probability set value as a specific display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the setting means displays the updated information for a certain period of time in a manner different from that after the lapse of the certain period as a specific display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows a probability set value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability set value change process. In this probability setting value confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed. In the case of this probability setting value confirmation mode, it can be determined from the fact that the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is set.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed is set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153. After that, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S433).

The term “during the game” means that the game corresponds to the execution of the special figure variation display game, the execution of the normal map variation display game, the special game state, or the hit state of the normal map. That is, it is a case where the state of the game is a prohibited state in which it is prohibited to start the probability set value confirmation mode. If the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the probability set value confirmation process ends. That is, when the game is in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. In this case, the effect control device 300 may be notified by transmitting information to the effect that the mode cannot shift to the probability set value confirmation mode because the game is being played.

The conditions for determining that the game is in progress (prohibited state) are not limited to those described above. One or more states selected from the execution of the special figure variation display game, the execution of the normal figure variation display game, the special game state, and the hit state of the normal figure may be a condition, for example, the special figure. It may be in the game when it corresponds to either the execution of the variable display game or the special game state. Further, conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be considered that the game is in progress and the mode may not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

Further, even if the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game detects the game balls, it is assumed that the game is in progress for a predetermined period, and the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. good. Further, while the front frame 12 is closed, it may be considered that the game is in progress and the mode may not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. Further, it is possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode during the power saving mode that shifts after a certain period of time has passed without the game being played. This power saving mode is released when the front frame 12 is opened, and the power saving mode can be regarded as the front frame 12 being closed.

Further, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state, that is, whether the operation unit is operated to set the predetermined state (step S434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S434; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set (step S435), and the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S436). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode is started, and the information of the probability set value currently set as the display of the probability set value display device 153 is displayed.

After that, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437), the command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability set value confirmation process is performed. finish. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined period. Further, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and produces a board effect based on receiving the command for confirming the probability set value. The operation of the device 44, the output of audio by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like are used to notify that the probability set value is being confirmed.

On the other hand, when the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. In this case, the probability set value confirmation mode continues.

If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S439; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode ends, and a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153 is set. Then, the command for ending the probability set value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S442), and the probability set value confirmation process is completed. The effect control device 300 ends the notification that the probability set value is being confirmed based on the command of the probability set value confirmation end.

That is, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position while the power is turned on, and ends by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, the probability setting value is changed.

As described above, by not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode even if the setting key switch is turned on when the game is in progress, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress. , The fairness of the game can be ensured. In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when the game is in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. If becomes, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not proceed, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

In addition, the condition for not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode is set to be during the game, but the condition is not limited to this, and the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100. Anything that selects whether or not to do so will do. For example, in the case of a high probability state, it is possible not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the probability setting value confirmation mode may not be entered when a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played on a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the setting value change button (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is based on the fact that the operation unit is operated to bring it into a predetermined state. , It is possible to set the confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is the prohibition state prohibiting the start of the confirmation state, the operation unit It means that even if it is in the predetermined state, it is not in the confirmation state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the probability set value being shown.

Further, the prohibited state is a state in which the game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, the prohibited state is a state in which a special gaming state is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and can generate the right to execute the game by winning, and the establishment of a predetermined condition. The hit state (normal figure hit state) in which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state when the result of the normal figure game becomes a specific result by executing the normal figure game (normal figure fluctuation display game) based on A normal variable winning device control means (game control device 100) that can be generated is provided, and the prohibited state is a state in which the normal figure game is being executed or a hit state is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, in the setting means, when the operation unit is set to the predetermined state in the state where the state of the game controlled by the control means is the prohibited state, and the prohibited state ends while the state is set to the predetermined state, the prohibited state is set. It will be in the confirmation state based on the end. Therefore, if the game does not progress, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and special features based on the winning are obtained. Figure Fluctuation display A game result pre-judgment is performed to predetermine a game result based on a prize at a stage before the start of the game.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, refer to it in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be used is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. The special figure normal process (step A8) for setting the information necessary for performing the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A12) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged and the jackpot end process are performed. The large winning opening residual ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for the operation is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit middle processing. The small hit fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A16) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. ..
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end processing The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. .. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. , End the special figure game processing. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. conduct.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the first step. 1 It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the starting port (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the first starting port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of holding by the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the second starting port. Determine (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the ordinary variation. When it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning of the game ball can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to the process of A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A113, if it is determined that the electric power fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), the special feature. Figure The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), information on the starting port to be monitored without winning is obtained. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting port (starting winning port 36) and the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (start memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A135; Y). Step A136), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition process is stored in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, in step A142, when it is determined that the prize is won in the first starting port (step A142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the small hit symbol of RWM is extracted. Save in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting area of the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and is the starting right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a starting storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of memories. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the start port winning flag saved in step A137 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and it is determined whether or not the first start port (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize. (Step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, in step A151, when it is determined that the first starting port has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure holding time is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A152, when it is determined that the special figure time is not shortened (step A152; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in progress (step A153).
If it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is not being hit or the small hit is not being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the prize is not won in the first start port (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A158 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A158; Y), whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not. Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to the process of step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A165). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A167).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

The big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 that are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing. That is, the determination is made according to the set probability setting value. Further, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment such as) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has started (step A309), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (step A309). A309; N) sets the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and the effect command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special figure normal processing is ended. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command that forms the standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A309 (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing the processes of steps A310 to A312.

Further, in step A301, when the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step A301; N), the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step A302). Next, the effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, and the special figure normal process is completed.
If the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" in step A305 (step A305; N), a decorative special figure reserved number command corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 1 is prepared (step A306). Next, the effect command setting process (step A307) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A308) is performed, and the special figure normal process is completed.

In this way, by checking the number of special figures 2 held before checking the number of special figures 1 held, if the number of special figures 2 held is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation display based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A321), and the first step is made. To set the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit, and to determine whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small hit. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the deviation information and the small hit information in the small hit flag of is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A324) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A325). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. Here, 100 ms) is set (step A333). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is completed.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 19A is performed in the second start. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 19B, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed hit flag 2 and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Here, 100 ms) is set (step A353). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process performed in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this jackpot determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability setting value, and the upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. Here, the corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value. The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value, the jackpot judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A382), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value is different depending on the probability setting value or the probability state. Is also good. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. To set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A389), and the jackpot determination process ends. Note that the loss in step A389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it will be determined as a small hit in a later small hit determination process. Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A383; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step A384). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is acquired (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). ). If the probability is not high (step A384; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). .. The upper limit determination value to be acquired here is acquired with reference to the upper limit determination value table set in step A381 described above.

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A358), and the jackpot determination process ends. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A389), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 change start process will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 21, in this small hit determination process, first, the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit determination value is provided for each probability set value. Moreover, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether or not it is in a high probability state. In addition, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value in the same probability set value do not overlap. The range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value between different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different. When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A404), and the jackpot determination process ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A404), and the small hit determination process ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A405), and the small hit determination process is completed. do.

As in the case of the big hit judgment, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. , The upper limit judgment value in the big hit judgment and the small hit upper limit judgment value in the small hit judgment may be collectively specified in the judgment value table provided for each probability set value. Further, although the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if it is a different probability setting value, the small hit lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value. In this case, it depends on the probability setting value. And select the lower limit judgment value for small hits.

Further, the probability setting value referred to in the process of setting the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381) and the process of setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401) are shown. If the value is an abnormal value that does not correspond to any probability setting value, the setting may be made assuming that it is a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or if an abnormality occurs. The game may be stopped and an error notification may be performed. Further, although the probability setting value is referred to for each judgment of the big hit and each judgment of the small hit, the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value when the probability setting value is set in the probability setting value change state. Or, a process of setting a small hit upper limit determination value may be performed, and this may only be referred to when determining a large hit or when determining a small hit.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure change processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the change symbol determination flag (special figure 1 change flag or special figure 2 change flag) is prepared (step A601), and the effect command is set. Process (step A602). That is, the symbol stop command that forms the stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the variation time of the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. Upon receiving this symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, and stops and displays the result.

After that, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 msec regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop symbol pattern. .. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, the process number "2" related to the process during display of the special figure is set as the process number (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606).

Next, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol) is saved. 2 (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the number of symbol confirmations related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal is set in the signal control timer area. Save the value (eg 256 msec) (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the processing during the special figure change is completed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM The process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the process of clearing the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM (step A704) is performed. Then, when it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705) and it is determined that it is a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 jackpot) starts. (For example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708). The round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, in step A705, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N) as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706), and the jackpot is a jackpot (step A706). When it is determined that A706; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is turned on. The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. It is saved in the upper limit value area of the number of rounds of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step). A717) is performed. This fanfare command forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1), and the big hit without a big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned OFF otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. It is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A724) for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It serves as a special game state generating means for generating a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), a high probability fluctuation number region for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high probability state. The high probability fluctuation number update process (step A726) for updating the value (high probability fluctuation count) and the effect mode information check process (step A727) for setting the effect mode are performed, and the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high. It is determined whether it is a stochastic state (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area, prepared (step A729), and the effect command is set. The process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of a small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, "7" related to the processing during the small hit fanfare is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned ON (big hit + small hit output). )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A737), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A739), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A742), and the special figure display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state. The high-probability fluctuation number update process (step A743) for updating the area value (high-probability fluctuation number) and the effect mode information check process (step A744) for setting the effect mode are performed, and the remaining rotation for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is performed. A number is set (step A745), and it is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect and the remaining rotation speed of the switching preparation match (step A746). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.
If it is determined in step A746 that the remaining rotation speeds for the effect and the remaining rotation speeds for switching preparation do not match (step A746; N), "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A749). ), The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A750), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752), and the special figure display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A746 that the remaining rotation speeds for the effect and the remaining rotation speeds for the switching preparation match (step A746; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the effect command is set. After performing the process (step A748), the process proceeds to the process of step A749. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game processing (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the Fuzu game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. The monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, it is referred to in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the normal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number (step B6) is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the normal figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and the effect setting of the normal figure change display game, and the normal figure change are in progress. Performs normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing.
Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal power opening time is set according to whether or not the time is shortened. In addition, the normal map display processing (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "3", the normal figure hitting process is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric power remaining ball processing is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per end processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "5", the normal figure per end process (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process (step) related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53. B15) is performed to end the normal map game processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process shifts to the process of step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed. conduct.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B301), and when the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B301; Y). ) Sets "0" for the normal processing of the normal figure as the processing number (step B322), and saves the processing number in the normal drawing game processing number area (step B323). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing of the normal figure is terminated.

If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) of the RWM. The loaded area, that is, the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game is It is determined whether the normal probability (that is, the low probability of the normal figure) is higher than the high probability of the normal figure, that is, the time saving state (step B303).

When the normal figure is not in the high probability (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the normal figure low probability is set (step B304), and when the normal figure is in the high probability (step B303). ; Y) sets the lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at the time of high probability in the normal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B306), and if the value of the hit random number is not equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B306; N), the value of the hit random number is step B304 or B305. It is determined whether or not it is less than the lower limit determination value set in (step B307).

When the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), the hit flag Save the outlier information in the area (step B308), set the outlier stop symbol number (step B309), save the outlier symbol information in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B310), and stop the stop symbol number in the normal symbol. Save in the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311), and the hit loaded in step B302. The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol. Save to the area (step B314).

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit probability at the low probability of the normal figure is 0/251, the hit probability at the high probability of the normal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is. "251", the high probability lower limit determination value is "1". Therefore, when the probability is low in the normal figure, the value of the hit random number is deviated in all cases of "0" to "250". In addition, when the probability is high, the hit random number value is any of "1" to "250", and the hit random number value is "0".
Further, in the case of this embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols.

After saving the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the order of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 held after the normal figure holding number 1 is moved up one by one. I do. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 of the random number storage area per the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B320). Then, the normal map changing process transition setting process (step B321) for shifting to the normal figure changing process is performed, and the normal figure normal process is terminated. That is, the game execution means in which the game control device 100 executes the normal map variation display game as the variable display game (based on the normal map start memory) based on the detection of the game ball at the normal map start gate 34 (inflow region). Make up.
In the case of the present embodiment, in step B320, the fluctuation time is set to 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. ..

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the normal map changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" related to the normal map display process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map variation display game on the normal map display 53, is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B403), and the fluctuation of the normal map ends. The signal (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and the stop flag indicating that the normal figure fluctuation display game is stopped is set in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area. Save (step B405), and end the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" related to the normal processing of the normal figure is set as the processing number (step B515), and the processing number is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area (step). B516). After that, the fraudulent monitoring period flag is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the normal map display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hit flag is the hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (for example, "0"). Or "5") and save it in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer (for example, “4” or “7”) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure hit end pointer area (step B506). Next, the normal power release time (for example, 1700 msec or 2600 msec) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B507).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal processing per map (step B508), and the processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B509). After that, a signal related to the start of hitting the normal figure variation display game (for example, turning on the signal for starting the normal symbol 1) and a signal for starting the normal electric operation (for example, turning on the signal for starting the normal electric accessory 1) are tested signals. In order to save in the output data area (step B510) and output the signal for driving (on) the normal electric solenoid, the on-data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B511).

Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the illegal winning number area (step B513). Then, a flag (a flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period) that defines the outside of the fraudulent monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the process during display of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal drawing hitting control pointer is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. (Step B602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by +1 (step B603), and the value of the control pointer per normal figure (step). Branch processing is performed according to the value before updating +1 in B603 (step B604).
When the value of the control pointer per normal figure is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the middle control pointer area per normal figure is not updated by +1 in step B603, and the control pointer area per normal figure is hit. Branch processing is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B604).

When the value of the control pointer is "0", "2" or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer is used. The wait time after the blockage of 37 is saved in the normal diagram game processing timer area (step B605), and the off data is saved in the normal electric solenoid output data area (step B606) in order to turn off the normal electric solenoid 37c. End the process during drawing.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is used. The opening time of the normal power is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B607), and the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B608). Ends the processing during the normal drawing.

If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer. To save the normal power release time in the normal power game processing timer area (step B609) and turn on the normal power solenoid 37c, save the on-data in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B610) and hit the normal power. End the process.

If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed. Is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B612), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the normal electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B614), and the processing during the normal drawing is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B605, the wait time is 300 msec, in step B607, the normal power release time is 1700 msec, in step B609, the normal power release time is 2600 msec, and in step B613. It saves 600 msec as the processing time for the remaining spheres of the normal electric power.
Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 28, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "1700 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, since the normal power release time is "1700 msec", the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the weight of 300 msec is 300 msec because the control pointer is "0". The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "1", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "2", so it is 300 msec. The wait time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "3", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4", so 600 msec. The remaining sphere processing time of the normal electric power is set.

Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "5" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 28, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "2600 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, the normal power release time is "2600 msec", so that the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then, since the control pointer is "5", the weight of 300 msec is waited. The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "6", so the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "7", so it is 600 msec. The normal electric remaining ball processing time is set. That is, the game control means 100 executes a normal figure game (normal figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the normal figure game becomes a specific result, the normal variation winning device 37 is opened. It serves as a control means for a normal variable winning device that can generate a hit state to be converted (normal figure hit state).

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S111), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116) are used. Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, when the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S801; N) and the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S802; N), , The off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (. Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is cleared in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. Move to the processing of. Further, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process of step S810 is performed without the process of step S809. Transition.

Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), and the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), it is common. When an electric fraud is occurring (step S813; Y) or a big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S814; Y). Step S817), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither magnet fraud has occurred (step S810; N), panel radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S811; N), frame radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S812; N), and general electric wave fraud has not occurred. (Step S813; N), if the large winning opening fraud is not occurring (step S814; N), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality is occurring (step S815).
When a switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If the switch error is not occurring (step S815; N), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step S820) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
Next, if the symbol confirmation number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the execution number of the special figure variation display game is not "0", the number is updated by -1 (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step S822).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S823), the external information editing process is terminated.
If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). S824), the external information editing process is terminated.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 32 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the initial setting of the CPU is performed (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect is performed. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, the sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and the control of LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the sub information display device 90 are performed. The decoration control process (step C18) to be performed, the movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 33 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of command receptions is completed is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. When it is determined that the copying of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in the step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is not the correct combination (step C232; N, step C233; N). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C237, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when the MODE determines that the range of the symbol-based command is within the range (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that are established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C241, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be displayed. It is a production such as performing a production display on. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance of the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 when the start prize is won. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

In addition, commands related to power-on and commands related to probability setting values are processed by single-shot command processing. Examples of commands related to power-on include commands for recovering from a power failure and commands for initializing RAM. Examples of commands related to the probability setting value include commands for changing the probability setting, changing the probability setting value, ending the probability setting change, checking the probability setting value, and ending confirming the probability setting value.

In the above first embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode, but the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. Even in the case of, the probability setting value may be changed. However, since the RAM is initialized when the probability setting value change state ends, either during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, during the execution of the normal figure fluctuation display game, during the special game state, or during the normal figure hit state. It may be a condition that it does not correspond to. Further, it may be a condition that the customer is in a waiting state. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may not be possible to shift to the probability set value change state.

Further, although it is assumed that the RAM 111C is initialized when the probability set value change state ends, the RAM 111C may not be initialized except when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the data of the RAM 111C.

Further, although the probability values corresponding to each probability setting value are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35A shows the probability setting value in this embodiment. The value of the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C takes a value of 0 to 5. The same applies to the working probability setting value area. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values in the probability setting value area. The display of the probability set value display device 153 is displayed in 1 to 6 corresponding to the value of the probability set value. Different probability values are assigned to the probability values in settings 1 to 6.

FIG. 35B shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, the probability values of settings 1 to 3 are assigned as settings 4 to 6. Therefore, it is practically possible to switch the probability value in three stages. Other than this, it is the same as in FIG. 35 (a). By doing so, when the six-step probability value is unnecessary, only the probability value needs to be different, and the design can be easily changed.

It should be noted that which probability value is assigned to which probability setting value is free, and for example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value of the probability setting value area (working probability setting value area) is updated by +1 by operating the setting value change button, the order of the probability values that change when the setting value change button is operated differs by changing the assignment. It becomes the order. Further, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to the two probability setting values, the change stage can be set to 4 stages, and can be set to any stage of 1 to 6 stages.

FIG. 35 (c) also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, the settings 4 to 6 in FIG. 35 (b) are set to settings 1 to 3, and the display on the probability setting value display device 153 is also set to 1 to 3 correspondingly. As a result, the display of the probability set value display device 153 and the probability value come to correspond to each other, and it is possible to make it easier for the person in charge of the work to grasp the probability value.

FIG. 35 (d) also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, it is possible to set only one probability value substantially, and even if the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to deal with it only by setting the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100. In this case, even if the setting value change button is operated, the same display is performed on the probability setting value display device 153, but the operation can be performed by performing the specific display (for example, blank display) as described above. It becomes easier for workers to understand that it has been accepted.

Although the number of values in the probability setting value region is set to 6, any number other than this may be used. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c), the number of values in the probability setting value region may be three. Further, in the case of FIG. 35 (d), the number of values in the probability setting value region may be one. Further, in order to make it possible to set a larger number of steps, the number of values in the probability setting value region may be 7 or more. Further, although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the selected probability value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

In addition, the probability value of the big hit is assigned according to the probability setting value, but the probability value of the small hit is also assigned, and the probability value of the small hit is also changed in response to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The jackpot probability value and the small hit probability value corresponding to each probability set value can be determined independently. However, if only the big hit and the small hit are to be obtained as a result of the special figure variation display game, it is necessary to set the probability value of the small hit according to the probability value of the big hit. Further, the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the big hit and the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the small hit may be set separately. Further, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Further, the probability of winning the normal map variation display game may be set according to the probability setting value that defines the probability value of the big hit, or may be set independently.

Further, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, and the like are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. This setting sub-board may be removed, and a sub-board or the like that has undergone termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion with the setting sub-board of the game control device 100. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate only the function of changing the probability value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and it is possible to reduce the cost. Further, in a gaming machine having no probability fluctuation function, an operation probability M may be provided for each probability set value.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the gaming control device 100 transmits a command for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out when the power is turned on.

The payout control device 200 in this modification includes a storage means capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is cut off. The storage means stores information on the payout command received from the game control device 100, and pays out based on the information stored here. In this way, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits the payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. .. Therefore, the information of the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage means of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, the main process shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this process, when the setting change instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the payout instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). The payout control device 200 starts payout based on the information backed up in its own storage means based on receiving the command of the payout instruction. By doing so, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be performed based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and it is possible to prevent the profit of the player from being impaired. can.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on receiving the command of the setting change instruction, in addition to the notification prompting the change of the probability setting value, the notification that the payout may be performed is also performed. You may. Further, the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200 not only in the above case, but for example, in the case of transmitting the command whose probability setting is being changed in FIG. 6 to the effect control device 300 (step). S40) or when the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), the payout instruction command (specific information) may be transmitted to the payout control device 200.

From the above, in a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special game state that gives the player a game value is generated when the result of the game is a special result, the game is played. The game control means (game control device 100) that controls, the effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means, and the probability value used for the lottery of the game are assigned. A setting means (setting means) that enables the selected probability setting value to be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The game control device 100) and the payout control means (payout control device 200) that controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information from the game control means, and the game control means stores the stored contents even when the power is cut off. A storage means (RAM 111C) capable of holding the information, a validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and a probability set value are selected. The information stored in the storage means is not legitimate by the validation means, including the initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit. When the determination is made, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means notifies the selection of the probability set value based on the reception of the specific information. The payout control means is provided with a payout information storage means that can retain the stored contents even when the power is cut off and can store the payout information received from the game control means, and when the specific information is received, it is stored in the payout information storage means. It means that the game medium is controlled to be paid out based on the payout information. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and not to impair the profit obtained by the player. Further, when the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but it is initialized by performing a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value. It is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example is prepared with a plurality of conditions for determining the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change process, a confirmation condition monitoring process (step S450) is performed to monitor whether or not the condition for determining the selected probability setting value is satisfied.

[Confirmed condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the confirmation condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and when there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y). ) Clears the end waiting flag (step S457), performs the processes of steps S421 to S415, and ends the confirmation condition monitoring process.

That is, when the worker performs the first operation of touching the operation handle 24, the first definite condition on condition of the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end standby flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second confirmation condition as described later, and here, the second confirmation condition is satisfied because the first confirmation condition on the condition of input from the touch switch is satisfied. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor the end wait flag, the end wait flag is cleared.

On the other hand, when there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, when the first determination condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not there is an end waiting flag (step S451). If there is an end waiting flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, the monitoring of the second definite condition has already started. If there is no end wait flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

If the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process ends. In this case, the probability setting value change state continues. When the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452; Y), the initial value (for example, 3 seconds) is saved in the change end timer area (step S453), and the end wait flag is set (step S454).

After that, if the change end timer is not 0, the change is updated by -1 (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process ends. When the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processes after step S457 are performed, and the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second confirmation condition is satisfied and the selected probability setting value is set when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch that performs the second operation is performed. It has become so.

As described above, in the present modification, the probability setting value selected by satisfying either the first confirmation condition or the second confirmation condition is set as the probability setting value used in the game. Until these definite conditions are satisfied, the selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area, and the information in the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored is changed. No. Therefore, if the power supply is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded and the original probability setting value is set.

In the probability setting value change state, the operation handle 24 may be touched to notify that the selected probability setting value is set. This notification may be always performed in the state where the probability set value is changed, or may be performed only in the state where the end wait flag is set. Further, the first definite condition and the second definite condition are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions and can be arbitrarily set. For example, the second confirmation condition may be set only when the setting key switch is turned off. Further, a probability setting value selected by preparing three or more definite conditions and satisfying any of them may be set.

Further, although it is assumed that the original probability setting value is set when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, if the information in the probability setting value area is set to the initial value (for example, setting 1) based on the start of the probability setting value change state, and the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, this initial value. May be set. In this case, an arbitrary probability setting value can be set in advance as the initial value, but for example, the same probability as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be a set value.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special gaming state is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the setting value change button (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means satisfies any one of a plurality of determination conditions. It means that the probability setting value selected based on is set. Therefore, the probability setting value can be changed without fail. Further, by providing a plurality of definite conditions, the degree of freedom of work can be increased, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved.

Further, the setting means does not set the selected probability setting value when the power supply is cut off before any one of the plurality of determination conditions is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

Further, the plurality of definite conditions include a first definite condition and a second definite condition, the first definite condition is that a predetermined first operation has been performed, and the second definite condition is the first operation. Is that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, the probability setting value can be changed without fail.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification does not have a setting key operation unit as a setting means, and does not have a setting key switch 152. In addition, the transition conditions to the changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed are different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, the main process shown in FIG. 39 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this process, when the backed up information is normal and the probability set value is not changed (step S21; N), is the set value change switch turned on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier? Is determined (step S61).

When the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process when the power is normally restored from the power failure. Further, when the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S61; Y), the transition determination process is performed (step S62). As will be described later, in the transition determination process, it is determined whether the transition condition to the probability setting value change state is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. ..

When the flag for changing the probability set value is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the figure is shown in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the set value can be changed. The process proceeds to step S35 of step 6. In this modification, since the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 does not have to be performed. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S63; N), the process proceeds to step S41 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is not normal, after setting the RAM clear start address 1 (step S25), is the set value change switch turned on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier? Is determined (step S64). When the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S64; N), the setting change instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28) to prohibit RAM access. (Step S29), the control is stopped and the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S64; Y), the transition determination process is performed (step S65). This transition determination process is the same process as in step S62. When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y), in order to perform the RAM initialization process and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. The process proceeds to step S35 of FIG. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Transition judgment processing]
FIG. 40 shows the transition determination process (steps S62, S65) in the above-mentioned main process. In this transition determination process, first, the initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S72). Step S73).

In this modification, the staff can shift to the probability set value change state by inserting the game balls into the winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the game area 32 is provided. From the state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input, it is determined whether or not this transition condition is satisfied. When this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y), the probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination process ends. As a result, the state shifts to the probability setting value change state.

If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), the transition standby timer is updated by -1 if it is not 0 (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75). .. Then, when the transition standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

If the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the transition determination process ends. That is, if the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is terminated without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, when the backed up data is normal, the process proceeds to step S41 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control, and when the backed up data is abnormal. Is the process of steps S28 and S29, and the control is stopped.

The transition conditions may or may not be changed at the amusement store. Further, although the transition condition is set to put the game balls in the winning area in a predetermined order, a predetermined number of game balls may be put in the predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detection means may be a transition condition. In this case, it may be a condition that only the detection by the detection means has been detected, or it may be a predetermined condition that the detection means has detected a plurality of times in a predetermined mode (detection number, detection interval, etc.). ..

Further, although the detection sensor in the winning region is used as the detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 and the set value change switch 151 may be used. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by a detection means that the player cannot freely operate during the game, such as a detection sensor in the winning area.

Further, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and are used as detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition is made when the state of each DIP switch is a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Further, the keyboard may be provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened and used as a detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition condition may be satisfied by the password input from the keyboard. ..

Further, only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the establishment of the transition condition is monitored and the transition to the probability setting value changing state is made possible, but the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Even when the set value change switch 151 is not turned on, the establishment of the transition condition may be monitored to enable the transition to the probability set value change state. In this case, the period for constantly monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may be set based on the power-on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition may be set when the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power is turned on. The period for monitoring the establishment of the above may be started.

From the above, in a game, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives the player a game value when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. The detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, large winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned. , Setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The setting means makes it possible to select a probability setting value when the detection means detects a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means functions in the same manner as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines that can change the probability setting value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value can be changed simultaneously on a plurality of gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

In addition, it is used in a game in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a game value to a player when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. A plurality of detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, large winning opening switch 38a) and a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned. A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). In addition, the setting means makes it possible to select a probability setting value when a plurality of detection means detect a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means functions in the same manner as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines that can change the probability setting value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value can be changed simultaneously on a plurality of gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

The setting means makes it possible to select the probability set value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode within a certain period after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

In addition, the plurality of detection means cannot be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability set value is changed by the set value changing operation unit configured by the DIP switch.

The DIP switch forming the set value changing operation unit is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and the input state thereof is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as set value change operation units, and the state of the DIP switch corresponding to each probability set value is defined.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, it is determined whether the state of the setting value changing operation unit has changed (step S461), and if it has changed (step S461), the value of the working probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value. (Step S462). As a result, the desired probability setting value is set by operating the setting value changing operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. Will be.

By using the DIP switch in this way, the work of setting a desired probability setting value becomes easy, and the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance. Since the set probability set value can be grasped at a glance, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided. Further, a cover covering the DIP switch may be attached so that the state of the DIP switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

Further, in order to make it easier to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch and turned on when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. Further, the confirmation LED may be turned on all the time, or may be turned on only in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

In addition, the setting value changing operation unit is not limited to the DIP switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary type switch, and any switch can be used as long as the probability setting value can be grasped by visually recognizing the state of each switch. Anything is fine.

Further, although the probability set value is changed depending on the state of the setting key switch 152, it is possible to shift to the probability set value change state depending on the state of the set value change switch 151 as in the third modification described above, and the predetermined time is set. The probability setting value change state may be terminated with the passage of. In this case, the probability setting value may be set based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

In addition, when the probability setting value is not changed, the currently set probability setting value is compared with the state of the setting value change operation unit, and monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the two states match. Is also good. The monitoring process may be performed at all times when the probability set value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time such as when the power is turned on or when the special figure fluctuation display game is started. In addition, it may be performed regularly at regular intervals. When it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, the notification that an abnormality has occurred may be given, or the game may be stopped.

[Fifth variant]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification cannot play a game when the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A for enabling the change of the probability setting value is broken. ..

In this modification, a setting sub-board serving as a setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153, and the like is provided, and this setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It has become like. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154. The setting value change switch 151 is not shown here.

FIG. 43A shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed and the input to the CPU 111A is LOW, and the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state. Based on this, the probability set value is not changed and the game can proceed. Further, the gaming machine of this modified example is provided with an LED that serves as a confirmation means that makes it possible to visually recognize the state of the setting key switch 152. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state.

FIG. 43B shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is opened and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, so that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

As described above, the probability setting value is changed on the condition that the setting key of the setting key operation unit is set to the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is turned on when the power is turned on. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 constitutes the specific operation information input based on the fact that the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, and is based on the input of the specific operation information. The probability setting value can be selected and the probability setting value is changed. In this probability set value change state, the game cannot proceed, and by ending the probability set value change state, the game can proceed.

FIG. 43 (c) shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43 (d) shows the case where the connector 154 is disconnected. In either case, the input to the CPU 111A is set to HI, and the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

That is, since the state is the same as when the probability setting value can be changed, the specific operation information is input in this case as well. As a result, the probability set value is changed and the game cannot proceed. In this way, by making it possible to input specific operation information even when the wire is broken or the connector is disconnected, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding when it is abnormal. Further, since the confirmation means is lit even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

Although the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 here, they may be directly connected without the connector 154. Further, although it is said that the setting sub-board forming the setting means provided with the setting key switch 152 and the like is provided separately from the game control device 100, the game control device 100 is provided with the setting key switch 152 and the like to provide the setting means. May be integrated with the game control device 100, and in this case as well, it is possible to detect a disconnection between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A or a disconnection of the connector by the same configuration.

Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is lost, but the specific operation is performed when the connection between the setting sub-board and the game control device 100 is lost. Information may be entered. Further, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 and the like in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output specific operation information.

From the above, in a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special game state that gives a game value to the player is generated when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value connected to the control means and assigned the probability value used for the lottery of the game are set by the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state. Based on this, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability setting value can be selected, and the control means does not proceed with the game when the specific operation information is input. If the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, the specific operation information is input to the control means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

Further, when the power is turned on while the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, the probability set value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

[6th modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 44 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability set value confirmation process, when the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability set value confirmation process ends. Further, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434), and when it is not in the on state (step S434; N), the off state confirmation flag is set. (Step S473), the probability set value confirmation process is completed. This off state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch was in the off state when the game was not in progress.

Then, when the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471). When there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472), the processing after step S435 is performed, and the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. On the other hand, when there is no off state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability set value confirmation process ends. That is, if the setting key switch is turned on during the game and the game is not in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode, and the setting key switch is turned off when the game is not in progress. When it changes to the on state, it shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

In this way, by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains on during the game, it is intended during the game in which the probability setting value confirmation mode cannot be entered. If the setting key switch is turned on without doing so, it can be prevented that the game is not in progress (not prohibited), the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode, and the probability setting value is displayed. .. That is, the probability set value can be confirmed only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) is an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) in a state where the state of the game controlled by the control means (game control device 100) is not a prohibited state. It means that the confirmation state is set only when the state of is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally shown.

[7th modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example includes a setting key operation unit forming the first operation unit, a setting value change button forming the second operation unit, and a RAM clear button as the third operation unit. A signal from the RAM clear switch that detects the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control device 100. Further, the RAM clear button, like the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button, cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

[Main processing]
In this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this main process, the process proceeds to step S41 when the RAM clear switch is on (the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed) (step S481; Y). That is, the RAM clear switch serves as an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Further, instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 46 is performed. In this probability setting value change process, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch (in the ON state) (step S482; Y), the processes after step S412 are performed to determine the selected probability set value. conduct.

In this way, the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the RAM clear button is pressed, and the probability set value can be confirmed by this RAM clear button. The work of determining the probability set value can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

In addition, when the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the probability setting value change state and the RAM is initialized, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed. Since it is possible to only initialize the RAM without shifting to the state, if you want to only initialize the RAM, you may need to operate the setting key switch or shift to the probability setting value change state. It is possible to improve the work efficiency in the amusement shop.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) includes a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value changing button (setting value changing switch 151), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch). ))) When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the predetermined operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) is operated, the storage means (RAM 111C). ) Can be initialized. Further, by operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), the selected probability setting value can be determined.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). Setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change button (setting value change switch 151)) and the third operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), and setting. A storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling a game by a control means including information of a probability set value selected by the means, and a closed state and an open state covering the front surface of the game machine 10. The main body frame (front frame 12) that can be converted and the open / close detection means (game control device 100) that can detect the open / closed state of the main body frame are provided, and the control means is an open / close detection means when the main body frame is in the open state. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation unit is being operated, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized to initialize the main body. When the open / close detection means detects that the frame is in the open state and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the third operation unit is operated, the probability set value cannot be changed without making it possible. It means that the storage means is initialized. Therefore, when it is desired to only initialize the RAM, it is not necessary to change the probability set value, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved.

Further, when the opening / closing detecting means detects that the main body frame is in the open state and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated, the control means is used. The probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized. When the main body frame is in the closed state, it is detected by the open / close detection means, and the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on in this state, the storage means is initialized without making it possible to change the probability set value. Therefore, even if the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated at the same time, the probability set value can be changed, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, when the main body frame is in the closed state, even if the first operation unit is operated, it does not shift to the probability set value change state, so that fraudulent activity can be prevented.

In FIG. 45, by performing the state of the setting key switch before confirming the state of the RAM clear switch, even if the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are operated at the same time, the probability setting value is changed. However, the transition condition to the probability setting value change state may be that the setting key switch is in the ON state and the RAM clear switch is in the ON state. By making the operation of a plurality of operation units a condition, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention to shift to the probability set value change state.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine of the first embodiment not provided with the RAM clear button, it is detected by the open / close detection means that the main body frame is in the open state, and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and when the main body frame is closed, it is detected by the open / close detection means, and , When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated, the storage means is initialized without making the probability setting value changeable. It can be said that. In this case as well, the fact that the setting key switch is on and the setting value change switch is on may be a condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit. Further, the setting means can determine the selected probability setting value by operating the third operation unit.

In FIG. 46, the functions of the probability value change switch and the RAM clear switch may be exchanged. That is, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the processing after step S407 is performed, the selected probability setting value is changed, and when there is an input from the setting value change switch, the processing after step S412 is performed. , The process of determining the selected probability setting value may be performed.

[8th modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The game machine of this modification differs in the operation of confirming the probability set value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In this modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 47 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change processing, when the setting value change switch is operated in the first input mode (step S491; Y), the processing after step S407 is performed to change the selected probability setting value. Further, when the set value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the processes after step S412 are performed, and the process for determining the selected probability set value is performed.

The first input mode here is an input mode in which the set value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within a predetermined time, and there is a first input mode when the pressing is completed. I try to judge. That is, the probability set value is changed when the set value change button is released (when the set value change switch 151 is changed to the off state) in a short pressing operation. The reason why the setting value change button is released is to prevent the probability setting value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

Further, the second input mode is an input mode in which the set value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed in a predetermined time or longer, and there is a second input mode when the specified time elapses. I try to judge. That is, the probability set value is fixed when the pressing operation is performed for a long time exceeding the specified time (when the set value change switch 151 is turned on for the specified time or more).

In this way, the probability setting value can be selected and confirmed by the setting value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while pressing the setting value change button. The work of changing, confirming, and clearing the RAM of the set value can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced. The first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the above-mentioned operations, and may be any operation as long as they can be discriminated from each other.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined operation unit among a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value changing button (setting value changing switch 151)). When the power of the gaming machine is turned on in the operated state, the storage means (RAM111C) can be initialized, and the selected probability setting value can be determined by operating a predetermined operation unit. Will be.

[9th modification]
Next, a ninth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 48 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred when the game is not in progress (step S433; N) (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability set value confirmation process is ended and the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode.

The predetermined abnormality can be set arbitrarily, but here, the magnet fraud, the panel radio wave fraud, the frame radio wave fraud, the general electric wave fraud, and the big prize opening fraud. If any of these abnormalities is occurring, it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. These abnormalities are abnormalities caused by fraudulent activity, and by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when such anomalies occur, the probability setting value is known to the person who commits the fraudulent activity. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Further, the switch abnormality, the shoot ball breakage error, the overflow error, the payout abnormality error, and the glass frame opening error due to the occurrence of the connector disconnection or the like are not included in the predetermined abnormality, but these may be included in the predetermined abnormality. Further, since the front frame 12 is opened to operate the setting key operation unit and the set value change button, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities has occurred, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside, so that the game store side is notified of the occurrence of the abnormality. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known before the person in charge confirms the notification of the occurrence of this abnormality.

It should be noted that this security signal is output for a predetermined period even when the RAM 111C is initialized or when the probability set value confirmation mode is started to prompt the confirmation of the gaming machine. In a device external to the gaming machine, it is possible to grasp that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the output of the security signal beyond the predetermined time.

In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode, but when a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the setting key switch is turned on. If all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the state is on, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, by applying the configuration of the sixth modification described above, the probability setting value confirmation mode is shifted only when the setting key switch is changed from the off state to the on state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has not occurred. You can do it. In this case, the off state confirmation flag is cleared when the game is in progress (step S433; Y) and when a predetermined abnormality is occurring (step S501; Y).

In this way, by preventing the transition from the probability setting value confirmation mode to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains on from the state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred, it is prohibited to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. If the setting key switch is unintentionally turned on while a predetermined abnormality is occurring, the probability setting value is changed to a state in which all the predetermined abnormalities have been resolved (a state that is not a prohibited state). It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed after shifting to the confirmation mode. That is, the probability set value can be confirmed only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special gaming state is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the setting value change button (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is based on the fact that the operation unit is operated to bring it into a predetermined state. , It is possible to set the confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the operation unit is in the predetermined state. Even so, it means that it is not in the confirmation state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the probability set value being shown.

Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormalities, the control means can output information to the outside of the gaming machine, and when any of the predetermined abnormalities occurs, the predetermined abnormality is found. It means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all the information is resolved. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to notify the outside that the probability setting value cannot be confirmed, and the probability setting value is shown. It is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by this.

Further, a storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game is provided, and the control means stores specific external information for a predetermined period when the storage means is initialized and the confirmation state is started. It means that it is output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

Further, in the setting means, when the operation unit is set to a predetermined state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has occurred and all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the predetermined state is maintained, all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved. Based on this, the confirmation status is set. Therefore, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when a predetermined abnormality does not occur, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

In addition, the setting means is set to the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state in the state where the predetermined abnormality has not occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally shown.

[10th modification]
Next, a tenth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example can shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 49 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S511). If the game is not in progress (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

On the other hand, when the game is in progress (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the process proceeds to step S435. As a result, it is possible to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game, and the game is interrupted during the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, after performing the process of step S442, it is determined whether or not there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game is not interrupted, the probability set value confirmation process ends. Further, when there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, when the game is interrupted, the game restart is set (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability setting value is set. End the confirmation process. As a result, the game that has been interrupted with the end of the probability set value confirmation mode will be restarted.

In the state where the game is interrupted, the display of the batch display device 50 may be temporarily erased, or the state immediately before the interruption may be continued. Further, if the game is interrupted during the variable display of the special figure variable display game or the normal map variable display game, the variable display on the batch display device 50 may be continued. Further, the batch display device 50 may be displayed to indicate that it is in a suspended state.

Further, when the game is interrupted, the interruption command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the game is resumed, the resume command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, so that the display device 41, the sound, the LED, etc. A light emitting member or a movable accessory may be used to produce an effect corresponding to the interruption. Further, the display or the like on the display device 41 when the game is restarted may be the same as the display or the like on the display device 41 when the power failure is restored.

Further, even during the interruption of the game, the winning to the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning opening 35, and the special variable winning device 38 may be valid or invalid. Further, even if the game is interrupted, the payout of the game ball may be continued.

[11th modification]
Next, an eleventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is designed to output the sound accompanying the change of the probability set value.

FIG. 50A shows an example of changing the probability set value. When the power of the gaming machine is off, turn the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position to turn on the setting key switch (t11), and turn on the power of the gaming machine in this state. The value is changed (t12). The game control device 100 transmits a command for which the probability setting is being changed to the effect control device 300 based on the set value change state, and the effect control device 300 notifies that the probability setting value is changed based on the reception of this command. Outputs a notification voice during change. The changing notification voice may be any voice, and examples thereof include a voice saying "probability setting value is being changed" and a specific music or alarm sound. In addition, the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 also notify that the probability set value is in the changed state. Is also good. For example, the display device 41 may display "The probability setting value is being changed". That is, the effect device used in the game is used to notify that the probability set value is in the changed state. By performing the notification using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value is in the changed state, and even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the clerk of the amusement store and the surroundings It can be noticed by the player and can prevent an illegal game from being performed.

Then, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the first position to turn off the setting key switch, the probability setting value changing state ends (t13). A command for ending the probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the set value change state, and the effect control device 300 sets for a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) based on the reception of this command. The probability setting value notification voice for notifying the information of the probability setting value is output (t13 to t14). After that, the sound is output according to the state of the game (t14).

The probability set value notification voice may be any voice, and for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), a voice corresponding to the set probability set value is output. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the sound "Probability setting value 1 has been set" is output. Of course, it may be a voice other than this, or it may be a specific music or an alarm sound. Further, the display device 41 also displays according to the probability setting value set in the same manner. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the display "The probability setting value 1 has been set" is displayed. Of course, the display may be other than this.

In addition to this, the display of the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 are notified as corresponding to the set probability setting value. You may do so. That is, the probability set value is notified by using the effect device used in the game. By notifying using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the clerk of the game store or the surrounding games. A person can be aware of it, and it is possible to prevent an illegal game from being performed.

In addition, when the probability setting value is changed, the external information indicating that the probability setting value is changed is output so that the external device (hall computer, etc.) can grasp that the probability setting value is changed. Is also good. Similarly, when the probability setting value confirmation mode is set, external information indicating that the probability setting value confirmation mode is output is output so that the external device (hall computer, etc.) is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. It may be possible to grasp. By doing so, the game store can immediately grasp the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, and can prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, the game may not be allowed to proceed for a predetermined period after the end of the probability set value change state. Further, the probability set value notification sound may be output during the period during which the game cannot proceed. By doing so, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally. Further, in the case of the probability setting value confirmation mode, the speakers 19a and 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device indicate that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect. It may be notified by a production device such as 44.

Further, each time the probability setting value is updated by the operation in the probability setting value change state, the sound corresponding to the updated probability setting value may be output. Further, the other effect device may similarly notify the updated probability set value in response to the update of the probability set value. This makes it possible to easily confirm the selected probability setting value.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. A control means (game control device 100) for controlling and a setting means (game control) capable of selecting a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a lottery of a game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating an operation unit. A device 100) and an effect device (speakers 19a, 19b, display device 41, sub-information display device 90, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, board effect device 44) for producing a game are provided and selected. The probability set value can be notified by the effect device. Therefore, fraudulent activity can be prevented. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability set value can be changed. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability set value can be confirmed.

In addition, after the end of the probability set value change state, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally.

<Suggestion production>
The gaming machine 10 can execute a pseudo-continuous effect that temporarily stops and re-variates the decorative special symbol (identification information), and a suggestion effect that suggests the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and the suggestion effect may be executed even when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. That is, after the suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, or the pseudo-continuous effect may not be executed.

FIG. 51 shows an example of the suggestion effect of the present embodiment.
When the special figure variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 executes the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41.
During execution of the decorative special figure variation display game, the display device 41 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 41a for displaying the decorative special figure variation display game, and the undigested The first waiting hold display unit 41b1 that displays the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory, and the second waiting hold that displays the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the undigested second start memory. On the display unit 41b2, the running hold display unit 41c for displaying information on the starting memory during digestion (starting memory corresponding to the currently executing special figure variation display game), and the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 41a. A variable display unit 41d for small symbols that variablely displays small symbols that are relatively smaller than the decorative special symbol (identification information) that is displayed variable, and a numerical hold display unit 41e that displays the number of undigested start memories numerically. And are provided.

The effect control device 300 determines, for example, whether or not to execute a pseudo continuous effect in the decorative special figure variation display game at the start of the decorative special figure variation display game, as an effect control command signal (effect command) from the game control device 100. Pseudo-continuous production lottery that is determined based on And do.
Then, when the suggestion effect lottery is won, the effect control device 300 performs the suggestion effect at a predetermined timing during the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b). An execution suggestion image G1 which is an image suggesting that the pseudo continuous effect may be executed, and an expectation suggestion image G2 which is an image suggesting the expectation (execution expectation) that the pseudo continuous effect is executed. Is displayed.
Further, when the pseudo continuous effect lottery is won, the effect control device 300 starts the pseudo continuous effect at a predetermined timing during the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (c). Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol G3 that notifies the start of the re-variation is stopped and displayed.

Since the pseudo-continuous symbol G3 is stopped and displayed at the start of the pseudo-continuous effect, the execution suggestion image G1 can be said to be an image suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol G3 may be stopped and displayed. Similarly, it can be said that the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is an image suggesting the expectation degree that the pseudo-continuous symbol G3 is stopped and displayed.
In the decorative special figure variation display game shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 54 described later, after a plurality of decorative special symbols are variablely displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the display device 41, the left, middle, and left, middle, and right The variation display is stopped in the order on the right and the result mode is displayed. Yes, for example, it may be in the order of left, right, and middle.

Here, in the present embodiment, the only difference between the execution suggestion image G1 and the pseudo-continuous symbol G3 is the high or low transparency. Specifically, the execution suggestion image G1 is a semi-transparent image of the opaque pseudo-continuous pattern G3. That is, the image displayed on the back side of the execution suggestion image G1 is visible (or easy to see) through the execution suggestion image G1, but is displayed on the back side of the pseudo-continuous symbol G3. The image is invisible through the pseudo-continuous symbol G3.
The difference between the execution suggestion image G1 and the pseudo-continuous symbol G3 is not limited to the high or low transparency, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the state in which the predetermined image is temporarily stopped may be referred to as the execution suggestion image G1, and the state in which the predetermined image is stopped may be referred to as the pseudo-continuous symbol G3.

The expectation degree suggestion image G2 is displayed side by side with the execution suggestion image G1 as shown in FIG. 51 (b), and the execution is displayed in front of the execution suggestion image G1 as shown in FIG. 51 (d), for example. It may be displayed overlaid on the suggestion image G1. That is, the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 includes a display mode in which the execution suggestion image G1 is displayed side by side and a display mode in which the execution suggestion image G1 is superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1. It is possible to suggest the degree.
Among the display modes of the expectation suggestion image G2, the display mode displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 is, for example, the mode shown in FIG. 51 (d) (that is, all of the expectation suggestion image G2 is the execution suggestion image). It may be a mode that overlaps with G1), or a mode in which a part of the expectation suggestion image G2 overlaps with the execution suggestion image G1.

Further, the display mode displayed on the execution suggestion image G1 may be a mode in which the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is displayed on the rear side of the execution suggestion image G1 on the execution suggestion image G1. Since the execution suggestion image G1 is a translucent image, both the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 are visible even when the expectation suggestion image G2 is arranged behind the execution suggestion image G1. Further, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 may be a translucent image. By making both the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 semi-transparent images, it becomes possible to visually recognize the appearance (variation display mode) of the decorative special symbol that is fluctuating at high speed.

The expectation degree suggestion image G2 is composed of at least one of a first specific image (character image "?") And a second specific image (character image "!"). That is, the display mode of the expectation suggestion image G2 includes a plurality of display modes in which the type, number, and arrangement order of the specific images constituting the expectation suggestion image G2 are different, and different execution expectations are suggested depending on the display mode. You can do it.

FIG. 52A shows an example of the execution expectation degree suggested by the expectation degree suggestion image G2.
As shown in FIG. 52 (a), for example, the display mode of the expectation suggestion image G2 includes a display mode (“?”) Consisting of one first specific image and a display mode consisting of one second specific symbol. A mode (“!”), A display mode consisting of two first specific images (“??”), a display mode consisting of two second specific symbols (“!!”), and a first specific symbol. The display mode in which the second specific symbol is arranged on the right side (“!?”) And the display mode in which the second specific symbol is arranged on the right side and the first specific symbol is arranged on the left side (“?!”) Yes, the suggested execution expectation differs depending on the type, number, and arrangement order of the specific images constituting the expectation suggestion image G2.

Further, as the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion image G2, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), a display mode displayed side by side on the execution suggestion image G1 and a display mode displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1. Even if the type, number, and order of the specific images constituting the expectation suggestion image G2 are all the same, the expectation suggestion image G2 may be displayed side by side on the execution suggestion image G1 or may be executed. The suggested execution expectation differs depending on whether the image is displayed overlaid on the suggestion image G1.

Specifically, for example, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. 51 (b), that is, the display mode (“!?”) In which the first specific symbol is arranged on the right side and the second specific symbol is arranged on the left side, and the execution suggestion. In the case of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 displayed in a display mode displayed side by side in the image G1, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the execution expectation degree (in the case of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. 51). It can be suggested that the degree of expectation that the pseudo-continuous production is executed) is 40%.
Further, for example, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. 51 (d), that is, the display mode (“!?”) In which the first specific symbol is arranged on the right side and the second specific symbol is arranged on the left side, and the execution suggestion image G1. In the case of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 displayed in the superimposed display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the execution expectation degree (in the case of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. 51, it is pseudo. It can be suggested that the degree of expectation that the continuous production is executed) is 50%.
Which display mode of the expectation suggestion image G2 is to be determined is determined in, for example, a suggestion effect lottery.

Here, the first specific image (character image "?") And the second specific image (character image "!") Are common to each of these two types of specific images, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (b). It is composed of a common part that is shared and a non-common part that is not common.
The type of the specific image is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.
Further, the common portion common to each of the plurality of types of specific images may be a portion having a common color or a shade, or the like, in addition to a portion having a common shape.
Further, the specific image does not have to be composed of a common part common to each of the plurality of types of specific images and a non-common part not common to each of the plurality of types of specific images. That is, the specific image does not have to have a common portion common to each of the plurality of types of specific images, but the expectation suggestion image G2 can be displayed with a unified feeling regardless of the display mode of the expectation suggestion image G2. From the above viewpoints, it is preferable that the specific image has a common portion common to each of the plurality of types of specific images.

Further, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is not limited to an image composed only of a specific image, and may include an image other than the specific image as long as it includes at least the specific image. Specifically, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is, for example, "maybe a pseudo-ream?" (Since? Is a specific image, it can be changed to! Is also good.
Further, the specific image is not limited to the character image, and may be a character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (a). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (a), the non-common part of the specific image (first specific image) on the left side is an image part imitating both eyes, and the non-common part of the specific image (second specific image) on the right side is sunglasses. It is an image part that imitates the above, and the other parts are common parts.
Further, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit result, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), for example, instead of the expectation degree (execution expectation degree) in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed by the expectation degree suggestion image G2. It is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation (big hit expectation). In that case, the suggestion effect can suggest that the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed by the execution suggestion image G1 and can suggest the jackpot expectation by the expectation degree suggestion image G2.

Further, the suggestion effect is not limited to the effect suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, and can be changed as appropriate.
As shown in FIG. 54, for example, the suggestion effect may be an effect that suggests a stop display of a predetermined general symbol. Here, the decorative special symbol includes a general symbol (designs 1 to 9) and a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol G3, etc.).

Specifically, first, the decorative special figure variation display game starts, then, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the variation display in the left variation display area is stopped, and then, for example, in FIG. 54 (b). As shown, the execution suggestion image G1 suggesting that the suggestion effect is performed at a predetermined timing, and the stop display of the predetermined general symbol (here, “5”) may be executed in the medium fluctuation display area. And the expectation degree suggestion image G2 suggesting the expectation degree (execution expectation degree) that the stop display of a predetermined general symbol is executed is displayed in the medium variation display area. After that, the fluctuation display in the medium fluctuation display area is stopped, and for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), a predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed, or a symbol other than the predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed.

Here, since the reach state is generated in FIG. 54 (c), it can be said that the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 54 (b) is an effect suggesting the execution of the reach effect. That is, in the execution suggestion image G1 shown in FIG. 54 (b), an image suggesting that the reach effect may be executed, that is, the same decorative special symbol as the decorative special symbol that has already been stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed. It can be said that it is an image that suggests that there is a possibility. Further, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. 54B has an image suggesting the expectation degree (execution expectation degree) that the reach effect is executed, that is, the same decoration special symbol as the decoration special symbol that has already been stopped and displayed. It can be said that it is an image that suggests the degree of expectation that the image is stopped and displayed.

In the suggestion effect suggesting the stop display of the predetermined general symbol, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 does not suggest the expectation degree (execution expectation degree) that the stop display of the predetermined general symbol is executed. The result of the special figure variation display game being executed may indicate the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) that will be the big hit result.

Further, the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54B targets the medium variation display area among the three variation display areas of the left, middle, and right constituting the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 41a, that is, the middle. The execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 corresponding to the variation display area are displayed, and it is suggested that the execution suggestion image G1 may stop and display a predetermined general symbol in the medium variation display area. , The expectation degree suggestion image G2 suggests the expectation degree that a predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed in the medium fluctuation display area, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the suggestion effect suggesting the stop display of a predetermined general symbol may target the left variable display area among the three variable display areas of left, middle, and right, or the right variable display area. It may be targeted at.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), a suggestion effect suggesting a stop display of a predetermined general symbol is provided for each of two variable display areas out of the three variable display areas of left, middle, and right. You may go. Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (e), a suggestion effect suggesting a stop display of a predetermined general symbol may be performed for each of the three variable display areas of left, middle, and right.
As shown in FIGS. 54 (d) and 54 (e), a plurality of suggestion effects are simultaneously performed by performing a suggestion effect suggesting a stop display of a predetermined general symbol for each of the plurality of variable display areas. Can be done. Furthermore, the results of multiple suggestion effects (whether or not the information suggested by the suggestion effects was correct) are not known at once, but are sequentially known for each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation stops, so the player's expectation is high. While continuing for a long period of time, the player's expectation can be gradually increased.

Further, as the suggestion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, the execution of the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display (hereinafter referred to as “hold display”) from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may be a production that suggests.
Specifically, first, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the decorative special figure variation display game starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 55 (b) or FIG. 55 (c), for example, a predetermined timing. The execution suggestion image G1 suggesting that the suggestion effect is performed in, and the hold change effect may be executed, and the expectation suggestion image suggesting the expectation (execution expectation) that the hold change effect is executed. G2 is displayed. After that, the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 are deleted at a predetermined timing without performing the hold change effect, or the hold change effect is performed at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 54 (d), for example. The hold display (here, a circle) in the first display mode changes to the hold display (here, a star) in the second display mode. In this case, the execution suggestion image G1 is, for example, a semi-transparent image of the hold display of the second display mode.

In FIG. 55 (c), a part of the expectation suggestion image G2 overlaps the execution suggestion image G1, but among the display modes of the expectation suggestion image G2, the display mode is displayed so as to be superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1. May be a mode in which the entire expectation degree suggestion image G2 overlaps the execution suggestion image G1, or a part of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 may overlap the execution suggestion image G1.
Further, in FIG. 55 (c), the expectation suggestion image G2 is arranged in front of the execution suggestion image G1, but among the display modes of the expectation suggestion image G2, the display mode is displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1. May display the expectation suggestion image G2 superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 on the front side of the execution suggestion image G1, or may display the expectation suggestion image G2 on the rear side of the execution suggestion image G1. It may be displayed on top of the image G1.
Further, in the suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 54 (b) and 54 (c), the execution suggestion image G1 and the degree of expectation corresponding to the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “execution hold display”) displayed on the execution hold display unit 41c. The suggestion image G2 is displayed to suggest that the execution suggestion image G1 may change the display mode of the execution hold display, and the expectation suggestion image G2 changes the display mode of the execution hold display. It suggests the degree of expectation, but is not limited to this. That is, the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 corresponding to the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "waiting hold display") displayed on the first waiting hold display unit 41b and the second waiting hold display unit 41b2 are displayed. It is displayed to suggest that the display mode of the waiting hold display may be changed by the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree that the display mode of the waiting hold display is changed by the expectation suggestion image G2. You may suggest it.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special gaming state can be generated when the result of the game becomes a special result. A game machine is provided with a suggestion effect execution means (effect control device 300) for executing a suggestion effect (see FIGS. 51 (b) and 51 (d)) that suggests execution of a predetermined advance notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect). In the suggestion effect, it is possible to display a plurality of types of specific images (for example, a character image of "?" Or a character image of "!"). The degree of expectation (execution expectation) at which the advance notice effect is executed or the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) at which the result of the game is a special result is different (see FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (b)).

Therefore, the degree of expectation (execution expectation) that the predetermined notice effect is executed or the degree of expectation that the result of the game is a special result (big hit) by the specific image displayed by the suggestion effect that suggests the execution of the predetermined notice effect. Since it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation), it is possible to enhance the interest of the suggestion production.
The suggestion effect is not limited to the effect suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect as the predetermined advance notice effect, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the reach as the predetermined advance notice effect. It may be an effect suggesting the execution of the effect, or may be an effect suggesting the execution of the hold change effect as a predetermined advance notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c). When the suggestion effect is an effect suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous suggestion image suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed as the execution suggestion image G1 in the variable display area of the suggestion target (FIG. 51). (B), (d)), When the suggestion effect is an effect suggesting the execution of the reach effect, the execution suggestion image G1 is a reach mode suggestion image suggesting the execution of the reach effect and the type of the reach effect. May be displayed in the variable display area of the suggestion target, and when the suggestion effect is an effect suggesting the execution of the hold change effect, the execution suggestion image G1 is used as the execution suggestion image G1 to suggest the hold change effect. The image may be displayed in the variable display area of the suggestion target.

Further, a plurality of execution suggestion images G1 may be displayed in one variable display area. In that case, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (a), a plurality of execution suggestion images G1 (here, reach mode suggestion images) are arranged on one circumference and moved along the one circumference to be predetermined. A roulette effect may be performed such that the execution suggestion image G1 stopped at the position is a real execution suggestion image, and the other execution suggestion image is a dummy execution suggestion image. By performing such a roulette effect, it becomes easy to understand which execution suggestion image G1 is genuine (here, what kind of reach effect is possible), so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (b), the expectation degree suggestion image G2 may be configured to execute an effect of performing a predetermined operation. In that case, the expectation suggestion image G2 operates with a part of the expectation suggestion image G2 as a reference (partly) from the viewpoint of clarifying the correspondence between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2. It is preferable to operate in a fixed state. In the example shown in FIG. 56A (b), the swinging motion is performed as a predetermined motion, but the predetermined motion is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, an expansion / contraction motion.
Further, from the viewpoint of clarifying that the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 are different images, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (c), the expectation suggestion image G2 is a specific image. It may include a surrounding frame image (area blocking image, area division image, suggestion symbol-related emphasized image).

Further, among the display modes of the expectation suggestion image G2, the display mode displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 is a fusion of the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2, as shown in FIG. 56A (d), for example. It may be a display mode that looks like it has been done.
Further, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 may be displayed at a position away from the execution suggestion image G1 instead of the vicinity of the execution suggestion image G1. In that case, for example, a relevance-enhanced image (effect image) straddling the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 may be displayed so that the correspondence between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 becomes clear. preferable.

Further, the positional relationship between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 can be appropriately selected, but from the viewpoint of preventing misidentification and clarifying the correspondence between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2. For example, as shown in FIG. 56A (e), a positional relationship such that the point portion below the expectation suggestion image G2 and the center line (horizontal center line) of the execution suggestion image G1 are at the same position, for example, FIG. 56A ( As shown in f) and (g), the positional relationship such that the point portion below the expectation suggestion image G2 and the upper or lower side of the execution suggestion image G1 are at the same position, and as shown in FIG. 56A (h), for example. In addition, the position where the center of the expectation suggestion image G2 is arranged on the center line (vertical center line) of the execution suggestion image G1 (or the position may be shifted to the left or right from the vertical center line). A positional relationship such that In the examples shown in FIGS. 56A to 56A, the display mode of the expectation suggestion image G2 is displayed side by side with the execution suggestion image G1, but the display mode of the expectation suggestion image G2. Is also a display mode in which is displayed overlaid on the execution suggestion image G1, and the same positional relationship is preferable.

Further, in the display mode displayed side by side on the execution suggestion image G1, the left variation display area is supported from the viewpoint of preventing misidentification and clarifying the correspondence between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2. As shown in FIG. 56A (f), the expectation suggestion image G2 is preferably displayed on the left side of the execution suggestion image G1 corresponding to the left fluctuation display area, and the expectation suggestion corresponding to the right fluctuation display area. As for the image G2, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (e), it is preferable to display the image G2 on the right side of the execution suggestion image G1 corresponding to the right fluctuation display area, and the expectation suggestion image G2 corresponding to the medium fluctuation display area. Is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56A (g) and 56A (h), above and below the execution suggestion image G1 corresponding to the variable display area (may be below, but if it is below, hold display). It is preferable to display the expected degree suggestion image G2 on the upper side) because it may be misunderstood that the expected degree suggestion image G2 corresponds to the hold display.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the suggestion effect, a plurality of types of specific images may be displayed, or one of a plurality of types of specific images may be displayed. When one type of specific image is displayed in the suggestion effect (for example, in the case of "?", "!", "??", "!!"), multiple types of identification When the images are displayed in the first sort order (for example, in the case of "!?"), And when multiple types of specific images are displayed in the second sort order (for example, in the case of "?!"). , The expectation that a predetermined advance notice effect is executed (execution expectation) or the expectation that the result of the game becomes a special result (big hit expectation) can be configured to be different (FIGS. 52 (a), 53 (FIG. 53). b) See).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a more detailed degree of expectation, so that the interest of the suggestion production can be further enhanced.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the predetermined advance notice effect is to display at least a part of the identification information (decorative special symbol) for a predetermined period in one game (special figure variation display game). It is a pseudo-continuous effect capable of executing a unit variation display for temporarily stopping information a plurality of times, and the suggestion effect is a pseudo-continuous effect by displaying a pseudo-continuous suggestion image (execution suggestion image G1 shown in FIGS. 51 (b) and 51 (d)). It is an effect that suggests the execution of the continuous effect, and a predetermined advance notice effect is executed depending on whether the specific image is displayed side by side on the pseudo-continuous suggestion image or the specific image is displayed superimposed on the pseudo-continuous suggestion image. It can be configured so that the expected degree (execution expectation degree) or the expectation degree (big hit expectation degree) in which the result of the game becomes a special result is different (see FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (b)).
With this configuration, the correspondence between the pseudo-continuous suggestion image and the specific image can be clarified, and a more detailed expectation can be suggested, so that the interest of the suggestion effect can be further enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific image may be composed of a common portion common to each of a plurality of types of specific images and a non-common portion not common to each of the plurality of types of specific images (FIG. 52 (b). )reference).
With this configuration, it is possible to display a specific image with a sense of unity, so that the interest of suggestive production can be further enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) in which identification information (decorative special symbol) is variablely displayed in a plurality of variable display areas is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the game is executed. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state when the result of (Implementation expectation)) is possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect (suggestion effect (see FIGS. 51 (b), 54 (b), (d), (e))). , A specific image (for example, a character image of "?" Or a character image of "!") Is displayed, and the degree of expectation (execution expectation) differs depending on at least one of the type, number, and order of the specific images (Fig.). 52 (a)).

Therefore, as a suggestion effect, it is possible to execute an expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests an expectation degree (execution expectation degree) in which predetermined identification information (decorative special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the variable display area. Can be enhanced.
In the present embodiment, the execution expectation and the jackpot expectation are different according to the type, number, and arrangement order of the specific images, but the execution expectation is according to at least one of the specific image type, number, and arrangement order. And the jackpot expectations should be different. For example, there is only one type of specific image, and the degree of expectation differs depending on the number of specific images (for example, in the case of "?", "???", and "???"). It is also possible.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the expectation degree suggestion effect (suggestion effect), a specific image (for example, a character image of "?" Or "!" Is superimposed on the variation display area of the suggestion target among the plurality of variation display areas. (Character image) is displayed, or a specific image can be displayed side by side in the variable display area of the suggestion target (see FIGS. 51 (b) and 51 (d)).
With this configuration, the variable display area of the suggestion target becomes clear, so that the interest of the suggestion production can be further enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) in which identification information (decorative special symbol) is variablely displayed in a plurality of variable display areas is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the game is executed. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state when the result of It can be executed as a target (see FIGS. 54 (b) and 54 (e)), and in the suggestion effect, a plurality of types of specific images (for example, a character image of "?" Or a character image of "!") Are displayed, and the suggestion effect is produced. The degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information will be stopped and displayed in the variable display area according to the order of the plurality of types of specific images displayed in (the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information will be stopped and displayed (execution expectation)). ) Is different (see FIG. 52 (a)).

Therefore, a suggestion effect suggesting that predetermined identification information (decorative special symbol) may be stopped and displayed in the variable display area can be executed for each of the plurality of variable display areas. Since the specific image displayed in the suggestion effect can suggest the degree of expectation (execution expectation) that the stop display is executed, the interest of the suggestion effect can be enhanced.
Further, by executing the suggestion effect for each of the plurality of variable display areas, it is possible to perform a plurality of suggestion effects at the same time. Furthermore, since the results of multiple suggestion effects (whether or not the information suggested by the suggestion effects was correct) can be known in sequence, the player's expectation continues for a long period of time, and the player's expectation is gradually increased. Can be done.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific image displayed in the suggestion effect is displayed on the variable display area targeted by the suggestion effect among the plurality of variation display areas, or the suggestion effect is displayed. Can be configured to be displayed side by side in the target variable display area (see FIG. 54 (e)).
With this configuration, it becomes clear which of the plurality of variable display areas is the target of the suggestion effect, so that the interest of the suggestion effect can be further enhanced.

<Modification example of suggestion production>
Here, FIG. 56B shows a modified example of the suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display (particularly, the waiting hold display) from the first display mode to the second display mode.
Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 56B (a), for example, the decorative special figure variation display game is started, and as shown in FIG. 56B (b), the suggestion effect is performed at a predetermined timing. The display mode of the predetermined waiting hold display (waiting hold display other than the waiting hold display to be changed) changes from the first display mode (here, a circle) to the intermediate display mode (here, a double circle). It is suggested that the pending change effect may be executed. It should be noted that the expectation degree suggestion image G2 suggesting the expectation degree (execution expectation degree) that the hold change effect is executed may be displayed side by side or superimposed on the waiting hold display of the intermediate display mode.

Then, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56B (d) and 56B (e), the periphery of the first character image G41 and the waiting hold display unit (first waiting hold display unit 41b1, second waiting hold display unit 41b2). The second character image G42 that performs a predetermined operation is displayed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 56B (d) and 56B (e), the second character image G42 rotates counterclockwise around the waiting display unit as a predetermined operation.
Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B (f), the second character image G42 performs a specific operation of specifying the waiting hold display of the change target. In the example shown in FIG. 56B (f), as a specific operation, the second character image G42 performs an operation of pointing to the waiting hold display of the change target by the notification image G43 for notifying the waiting hold display of the change target. ing.
Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B (g), the first character image G41 performs an action operation that acts on the waiting hold display of the change target. In the example shown in FIG. 56B (g), the first character image G41 throws the action image G44 imitating the hold display of the second display mode toward the waiting hold display of the change target as the action action. ing.
Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B (h), the display mode of the waiting hold display of the change target changes from the first display mode (here, a circle) to the second display mode (here, a star).

In the example shown in FIG. 56B, the action image G44 thrown by the first character image G41 is displayed on hold after the change as it is, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first character image G41 is after the change. The display may be on hold while waiting, or an image different from the action image G44 or the first character image G41 may be displayed on hold after the change.
Further, when there are a plurality of waiting hold displays of the change target, one second character image G42 may perform a specific operation for each waiting hold display of the change target, or each of the plurality of second character images G42 may perform a specific operation. May perform a specific action on the waiting hold display of the corresponding change target.

Further, it is possible to extend the operation range of the predetermined operation of the second character image G42 not only to the waiting hold display unit but also to the executing hold display unit 41c. That is, in the second character image G42, as a predetermined operation, for example, the surroundings of the waiting hold display unit (first waiting hold display unit 41b1 and the second waiting hold display unit 41b2) and the executing hold display unit 41c are counterclockwise. It is also possible to perform a clockwise rotation operation. As a result, it is possible to make it appear that the display mode of the pending display may change.
Further, when the operation of rotating the second character image G42 in the counterclockwise direction is performed as a predetermined operation, the hold display of the first display mode is, for example, an image rotating in the clockwise direction as shown in FIG. 56B (i). It may be an image including (here, an image imitating the hands of a clock). As a result, a predetermined operation (operation of turning counterclockwise) of the second character image G42 can be made conspicuous.

<Modification example A of the game board>
The game board 30 (including the center case 40 in this modification) may be made of at least a part of a transparent material.
An example of the game board 30 of the modified example A will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 (a). FIG. 57 is a front view schematically showing the game board 30 of the modified example A, and FIG. 58 (a) shows a left overlapping area in the display unit of the display device 41 attached to the game board 30 of the modified example A. It is a figure for demonstrating 41L and right side overlap area 41R.

For example, as shown in FIG. 57, an opening 30b is provided in a substantially central portion of the gaming board 30, and the display portion (display area) of the display device 41 is visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine 10 through the opening 30b. It is possible. The left-right length (width) of the opening 30b is shorter than the left-right length of the display unit of the display device 41. Therefore, the left end region of the display unit of the display device 41 (the region on the left side surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 58 (a)) is the left overlapping region 41L that overlaps the game board 30 in the front-rear direction, and displays the display device 41. The right end region (the region on the right side surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 58A) is the right overlapping region 41R that overlaps the game board 30 in the front-rear direction.
The game board 30 covers the left side covering area 41L covering the left side overlapping area 41L of the display unit (overlapping front and back with the left side overlapping area 41L) and the right side covering portion covering the right side overlapping area 41R of the display part (overlapping front and back with the right side overlapping area 41R). The part is made of a transparent material. Therefore, the left overlapping area 41L of the display unit can be visually recognized through the left side covering portion of the game board 30, and the right overlapping area 41R of the display unit can be visually recognized through the right side covering portion of the game board 30. .. The game board 30 may be made of a transparent material at least for the left side covering portion and the right side covering portion.

The front surface of the left side covering portion of the game board 30 (hereinafter referred to as “left side flow area 32L”) is a part of the left side game area of the game area 32, and the game ball can flow down. Further, the front surface of the right side covering portion of the game board 30 (hereinafter referred to as "right side flow area 32R") is a part of the right side game area of the game area 32, and the game ball can flow down.
Therefore, it can be said that the left overlapping area 41L of the display unit can be visually recognized through the left flow area 32L of the game area 32. Further, it can be said that the right overlapping area 41R of the display unit can be visually recognized through the right flow area 32R of the game area 32.

In the display device 41, as the brightness of the display color of the display unit decreases, the amount of light illuminating the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit (the game ball flowing down the left side flow area 32L and the right side flow area 32R) decreases. Therefore, the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit looks dark. Therefore, if the display color of the display unit is too dark (the brightness of the display color is below the lower threshold value), the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit is assimilated with the display (dark display) of the display unit, making it difficult to see. become.
On the other hand, as the brightness of the display color of the display unit increases, the amount of light illuminating the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit (the game ball flowing down the left flow area 32L or the right flow area 32R) increases, so that the display is displayed. The game ball flowing down in front of the club looks bright. Therefore, if the display color of the display unit is too bright (the brightness of the display color exceeds the upper threshold value), the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit is assimilated with the display (bright display) of the display unit, making it difficult to see. Become.
Therefore, even if the brightness of the display color of the display unit is lower than the lower threshold value or the brightness of the display color of the display unit exceeds the upper threshold value, it is difficult to check the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit. Will decrease.

Therefore, in the case of this modification, that is, when a game board 30 (for example, a game board 30 as shown in FIG. 57) having a configuration in which a game ball can flow down in front of the display unit of the display device 41 is used as the game board. A color whose brightness falls within the permissible range (hereinafter referred to as "sphere visibility ensuring color") is displayed in at least a part of each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R. Specifically, when a game board 30 having a configuration in which a game ball can flow down in front of the display unit of the display device 41 is used as the game board, image data for the display device 41 stored in the image ROM 325 is created. At that time, it is created in consideration so that the ball visibility ensuring color is displayed in at least a part of each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R.

Here, the allowable range of brightness will be described.
For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the color brightness of the image (blackout image) having the lowest brightness among the images that can be displayed on the display unit of the display device 41 is set to "0", and the display unit of the display device 41 has a color brightness of "0". When the color brightness of the image with the highest brightness (whiteout image) among the displayable images is set to "100", the color brightness of the image displayed on the display unit of the display device 41 takes a value of 0 to 100. .. In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the lower threshold value of lightness is set to "20", the upper threshold value is set to "80", and the permissible range of lightness is set to a range of 20 or more and 80 or less. That is, the brightness of the color for ensuring the visibility of the sphere is within the range of 20 or more and 80 or less. Of course, the permissible range of brightness is not limited to the range of 20 or more and 80 or less, and can be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 59 shows an example of a display effect performed when a game board 30 having a configuration in which a game ball can flow down in front of the display unit of the display device 41 is used as the game board. FIG. 59 (a) is an example of a blackout-type effect, and FIG. 59 (b) is an example of a whiteout-type effect.
In the case of a blackout type effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), a medium brightness image Q in which the brightness of the display color is within the permissible range is displayed in each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R. By doing so, the ball visibility ensuring color can be displayed in at least a part of each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R.
Further, also in the case of the whiteout type production, for example, as shown in FIG. 59B, the medium brightness image Q in which the brightness of the display color is within the permissible range is displayed in the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R, respectively. It is possible to display the ball visibility ensuring color in at least a part of each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the left side flow area 32L of the game area 32 has the medium brightness image Q displayed in the left side overlap area 41L of the display unit (that is, the brightness of the display color of the left side overlap area 41L is within the permissible range. The game ball that passes in front of the area that fits in the right side of the game area 32 and flows down the right side flow area 32R of the game area 32 is the medium brightness image Q (that is, the right side overlap area 41R) displayed in the right side overlap area 41R of the display unit. Of these, the area where the brightness of the display color falls within the permissible range) will pass in front of it. Then, since the game ball becomes easy to see when it passes at least in front of the medium brightness image Q (that is, the area where the color for ensuring the visibility of the ball is displayed), the player can see the front of the display unit of the display device 41. (That is, the game ball flowing down the left side flow area 32L and the right side flow area 32R) can be easily confirmed, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), only the background image is shown among the images displayed on the display unit of the display device 41. That is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 58A and 58B, by displaying the background image including the medium brightness image Q, the sphere visibility is in at least a part of each of the left overlapping region 41L and the right overlapping region 41R. The reserved color can be displayed.

Here, in the present invention, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used in the drawing control of the display screen displayed on the display unit of the display device 41. A scenario is, for example, a background scenario, a left symbol scenario, a right symbol scenario, etc., and a display effect such as a pattern variation effect is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) in advance as a table. It is a method to generate a picture on one screen by setting, controlling them individually as scenarios, and synthesizing all the scenarios.
The plurality of display layers (scenario layers) are individually categorized for each display element, such as the background, the left symbol, the right symbol, and so on, and each of them independently displays a plurality of motion information simultaneously or continuously. It is set as a table of operation scenarios for switching and displaying the effect.

In the present invention, the display elements (display components) used in the production of the display device 41 are "background", "left symbol", "right symbol", "middle symbol", "notice 1 character", and "notice 2". It is divided into eight elements: "character", "hold display (decorative special figure start memory display)", and "small design".
Then, a scenario table for a display effect such as a variable effect is created by being divided into each of a plurality of display elements. In the present invention, the scenario table includes "background control scenario table", "left symbol control scenario table", "right symbol control scenario table", "middle symbol control scenario table", and "notice 1 character control scenario". It is created by being divided into eight elements: "table", "preliminary notice 2 character control scenario table", "hold display control scenario table", and "small symbol control scenario table".
Further, each display element is composed of a display layer, and these plurality of display layers are sequentially overlapped from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen to create one display screen. In the case of the present invention, the display layers include "background layer", "left symbol layer", "right symbol layer", "middle symbol layer", "notice A layer" to "notice F layer", "holding layer" and There are 12 types of "small symbol layers".

In the effect display editing process (step C13) of the main process (FIG. 32), the effect control device 300 draws a predetermined image in the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326 in the order of the number of the motion management areas as many as the number of motion management areas (step C13). That is, the process of pasting the sprite of a predetermined image into the virtual drawing space) is performed.
As shown in FIG. 60, the virtual drawing space is divided into 12 drawing areas from a drawing area for motion management area 0 to a drawing area for motion management area 11. The drawing areas are arranged in numerical order of the corresponding motion management areas, and a display layer on which a predetermined image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Specifically, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 first creates a "background layer" on which a predetermined image is drawn in the virtual drawing space when the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL. It is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 0.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the "preliminary A layer" on which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the motion management area 1 drawing area of the virtual drawing space.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, the "notice B layer" on which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the motion management area 2 drawing area of the virtual drawing space.

Hereinafter, similarly, when the data of the address area of the motion management area 3 is not FULL, the "left symbol layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 of the virtual drawing space, and then the address area of the motion management area 4 When the data is not FULL, the "right symbol layer" is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 4 of the virtual drawing space, and then when the data in the address area of the motion management area 5 is not NUML, the "middle symbol layer" is virtualized. It is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 5 of the drawing space, and then the "notice C layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 6 of the virtual drawing space when the data in the address area of the motion management area 6 is not FULL. Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 7 is not FULL, the "notice D layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7 in the virtual drawing space, and then the data in the address area of the motion management area 8 is stored. If it is not FULL, the "holding layer" is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 8 of the virtual drawing space, and then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 9 is not NUML, the "notice E layer" is stored in the virtual drawing space. It is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 9, and then, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is not FULL, the "notice F layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space, and then When the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is not FULL, the "small symbol layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 in the virtual drawing space, and the effect display editing process is completed.

Here, when the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area, so that the drawing area remains blank. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is NULL, the display layer in the motion management area 10 drawing area of the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326 (in the case of the present invention, the "notice F layer". ”) Is not stored, so that the drawing area for the motion management area 10 remains blank. It is also possible to sequentially store the display layers so that the non-blank drawing areas are continuous (that is, the display layers are stored while being packed in front), but in that case, one display screen is configured. Since the drawing area for storing display layers other than the background layer changes according to the number of display layers to be displayed, each time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space, the drawing area for storing the display layer (that is, blank) It is necessary to search the foremost (first) side of the drawing area), which complicates the processing. On the other hand, as in the present invention, display is performed by configuring each display layer to be stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect content (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen). Since it is not necessary to search the drawing area for storing the display layer each time the layer is stored in the virtual drawing space, the processing load can be reduced.

The display layers stored in each drawing area are sequentially stacked from the back side (lower layer side) of the screen to the front side (upper layer side) of the screen in the order of arrangement of the drawing areas to create one display screen. Specifically, in the present invention, for example, as shown in FIG. 60, the "background layer" stored in the drawing area for motion management area 1 located at the head of the 12 drawing areas is the deepest on the screen. The "small symbol layer" that is arranged on the side (bottom layer) and stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 located at the end of the 12 drawing areas is arranged on the front side (top layer) of the screen. Will be done.

In such an effect control, when the effect screen (display screen) is generated, it is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display elements of the effect screen and set in advance as a table, and then they are individually set. By controlling as a scenario and synthesizing all the scenarios in the form of a display layer, a one-screen picture is generated and displayed on the display device 41.
In the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 has, for example, a waiting hold display (decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the waiting hold display unit 41b) and an executing hold display (execution) on the “hold layer”. The decorative special figure start memory display) displayed on the middle hold display unit 41c is drawn. Further, in the "small symbol layer", a small symbol (identification symbol displayed on the variable display unit 41d for small symbols) and a number indicating the number of undigested start memories (number displayed on the number hold display unit 41e). And draw.

The background image is an image drawn on the "background layer". That is, in the examples shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the illustration of the image drawn on each layer other than the "background layer" is omitted.
The medium-brightness image Q is not limited to that included in the background image. Specifically, the medium-brightness image Q may be, for example, an image (notice image) drawn on any of the "notice A layer" to the "notice F layer".

Further, in the game board 30 having a configuration in which the game ball can flow down in front of the display unit of the display device 41, the game board 30 as shown in FIG. 57, that is, the left overlapping area 41L of the display unit is the left side flow area of the game area 32. The game board 30 is not limited to the game board 30, which is visible through the 32L and the right overlapping area 41R of the display unit is visible through the right flow area 32R of the game area 32.
As shown in FIG. 61A, for example, the game board 30 having a configuration in which the game ball can flow down in front of the display unit of the display device 41 is only one of the left end region and the right end region of the display unit of the display device 41. It may cover (here, only the rightmost region). The game board 30 may be made of a transparent material at least as long as the portion covering the display portion of the display device 41 (here, the right covering portion) is made of a transparent material. In the case of the game board 30, only one of the left end area and the right end area of the display unit of the display device 41 is an overlapping area that overlaps the game board 30 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b). The ball visibility ensuring color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping region (here, the right overlapping region 41R).

Further, the game board 30 having a configuration in which the game ball can flow down in front of the display unit of the display device 41 receives the game ball flowing down the game area 32 and moves to the stage unit 32S, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (a). The game board 30 may be equipped with a warp flow path forming member that forms the warp flow path 32W that guides the player. The game board 30 may have at least a warp flow path forming member made of a transparent material.
The warp flow path 32W is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow down in a row, is a part of the game area 32, and opens toward the left game area of the game area 32, and the left side thereof. It is possible to accept game balls that flow down the game area. The upstream end forms the inflow port of the warp flow path 32W, the downstream end forms the outflow port of the warp flow path 32W, and the warp flow path 32W displays the game ball flowing in from the upstream end of the display device 41. After guiding to the front of the display unit, it is guided to the left end portion of the stage portion 32S. In the case of the game board 30, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), a warp overlapping area 41W that overlaps with the warp flow path 32W of the display unit of the display device 41 (the area surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 62 (b)). The color for ensuring the visibility of the ball is displayed on.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 59 (a), 59 (b), 61 (b), and 62 (b), an image imitating a lightning bolt is displayed as the medium brightness image Q, but of course, the medium brightness. The image Q is not limited to an image imitating a lightning bolt and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the brightness of the display color of the medium-brightness image Q does not have to be uniform. Specifically, the medium-brightness image Q may be, for example, a gradation image in which the lightness changes stepwise within an allowable range.
Further, the display color of the medium-brightness image Q (that is, the color for ensuring the visibility of the sphere) is arbitrary in hue and saturation as long as the lightness is within the permissible range.
Further, the display position, size, shape, etc. of the medium-brightness image Q may or may not be fixed, but the display device 41 displays a natural image on the display unit of the display device 41. It is preferable that the image is not fixed from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom of the image composition displayed on the display unit of.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), separate medium-brightness images Q are displayed in the left overlapping region 41L and the right overlapping region 41R, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, when the display unit of the display device 41 has a plurality of overlapping areas that overlap the game board 30 in the front-rear direction, a plurality of medium-brightness images Q straddling the plurality of overlapping areas are displayed. The sphere visibility ensuring color may be displayed in at least a part of each of the overlapping areas.
Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), two medium-brightness images Q are displayed in the left overlapping area 41L, but when displaying a plurality of medium-brightness images Q in one overlapping area, The distance between adjacent medium-brightness images Q is preferably less than or equal to one game ball. By setting the distance between adjacent medium-brightness images Q to one game ball or less, the game balls that move (roll or flow down) from one medium-brightness image Q to the other medium-brightness image Q are not interrupted. You will be able to continue to check.

Further, the color for ensuring the visibility of the sphere is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, only the image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in a predetermined period is the overlapping area. It may be an image (display screen) in which at least a part of the color for ensuring the visibility of the sphere is displayed.
Specifically, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 61, when only a part of the right game area (right side flow area 32R) of the game area 32 overlaps the display unit of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction, at least the right side. The image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in the hitting game state (the game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting) is an image in which the ball visibility ensuring color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area. (Display screen) is sufficient.
Further, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 62, when only a part of the left game area (warp flow path 32W) of the game area 32 overlaps the display unit of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction, at least the left-handed game state The image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in (a game state in which left-handed is more advantageous than right-handed) is an image (display screen) in which a ball visibility ensuring color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area. ) Is fine.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present modification, in the game machine including the game board 30 in which the game area 32 in which the game ball flows down is formed, and the display means (display device 41) having a display unit. A predetermined game ball flow area (left side flow area 32L, right side flow area 32R, warp flow path 32W) in the game area 32 is located in front of the display unit, and is located in front of and behind the predetermined game ball flow area in the display unit. The overlapping overlapping areas (left side overlapping area 41L, right side overlapping area 41R, warp overlapping area 41W) can be visually recognized through the predetermined game ball flow area, and the brightness is a predetermined threshold value in at least a part of the overlapping area. Colors above (lower threshold) (colors that ensure ball visibility) are displayed.
Therefore, even if a blackout-type effect (that is, an effect of displaying an overall dark image on the display device 41) is performed, the brightness of the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit has a predetermined threshold value (lower threshold value). When passing in front of the area where the above color (ball visibility assurance color) is displayed, it is not assimilated with the display on the display unit and is easy to see. Therefore, the visibility of the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit is easy. Can be secured. Further, by ensuring the visibility of the game ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being stopped (preventing the game ball from being launched because it is difficult to see).
The brightness of the color for ensuring the visibility of the sphere may exceed the upper threshold value as long as it is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (lower threshold value).

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the present modification, the game is played in a game machine including a game board 30 in which a game area 32 into which the game ball flows down is formed, and a display means (display device 41) having a display unit. The predetermined game ball flow area (left side flow area 32L, right side flow area 32R, warp flow path 32W) in the area 32 is located in front of the display unit and overlaps the predetermined game ball flow area in the display unit in the front-rear direction. The overlapping region (left overlapping region 41L, right overlapping region 41R, warp overlapping region 41W) is visible through the predetermined gaming ball flow-down region, and at least a part of the overlapping region has a predetermined brightness (brightness). Colors below the upper threshold value (colors that ensure ball visibility) are displayed.
Therefore, even if a whiteout-type effect (that is, an effect of displaying an overall bright image on the display device 41) is performed, the brightness of the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value (upper threshold value). When passing in front of the area where the color of (ball visibility assurance color) is displayed, it is not assimilated with the display on the display and is easy to see. Therefore, the visibility of the game ball flowing down in front of the display is improved. Can be secured. Further, by ensuring the visibility of the game ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being stopped (preventing the game ball from being launched because it is difficult to see).
The brightness of the color for ensuring the visibility of the sphere may be lower than the lower threshold value as long as it is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value (upper threshold value).

The display means is not limited to the display device 41, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the display means may be, for example, a display device (sub-display device or the like) provided separately from the display device 41, or predetermined information (characters, images, etc.) when light is incident from the end face. A light guide plate having a light emitting pattern composed of fine irregularities by laser processing or the like may be used so as to make the image stand out.
Further, the medium brightness image Q may be, for example, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (d), that is, a specific image (for example, a character image of "?" Or a character image of "!"). good.

<Modification example B of the game board>
A modification B of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 78.
FIG. 63 is a front view schematically showing the game board 30 of the modified example B.
In the game board 30 of the present modification, the point that the out zone unit 800 having the start winning opening 36 (the first starting winning opening, the starting winning area) is arranged above the out opening 30a is the above-described embodiment. It is different from the game board 30 of the above modified example.
Further, in the game board 30 of the present modification, the normal variable winning device 37 is arranged between the normal symbol starting gate 34 and the special variable winning device 38 in the right game area of the game area 32. It is different from the game board 30 of the above embodiment and the above modification.

Further, the game board 30 of the present modification is different from the game board 30 of the above embodiment and the above modification in that the main display device 41a and the sub display device 41b are provided as the display device 41.
The main display device 41a (variable display device) has a configuration in which three 7-segment displays (variable display areas) in which seven light emitters (segments) are arranged in a figure of eight are arranged side by side. Each light emitting body can independently change the light emitting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emitting color, etc.), and by controlling the light emitting mode, identification information (special symbol) can be displayed for each 7-segment display. be. It is also possible to display information by combining a plurality of 7-segment displays. In the main display device 41a, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of identification information (special symbols) are variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed in response to the special figure variation display game. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect related to the special figure variation display game by changing the light emitting mode.

The sub-display device 41b is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode ray tube).
On the display screen of the sub-display device 41b, information about the game such as a character that directs the special figure variation display game and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. Further, on the display screen of the sub display device 41b, a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the undigested start memory and an image for directing based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending) are displayed. Display image, etc.) is displayed.

FIG. 64 is a view for explaining the out zone unit 800, and is a view (front view) seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 65 is a view for explaining the out zone unit 800, and is a perspective view seen from the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the out-zone unit 800 is arranged in the inflow port 810 arranged in the upper part of the out-zone unit 800, the left and right upper effect flow paths 820, and the central part of the out-zone unit 800. The middle effect flow path 830 and the left and right splash members 840 provided, the lower effect flow path 850 and the outflow port (out port) 860 arranged at the lower part of the out zone unit 800, and the middle effect flow path 830 and the bottom. It is provided with a pseudo winning opening 870 and left and right rotating bodies 880 arranged between the effect flow path 850.

A game ball that has not won a prize in any of the plurality of winning areas provided in the game area 32 can flow into the inflow port 810. Therefore, in this modification, the game ball that does not win in the winning area provided in the game area 32 flows into the out port 30a or the inflow port 810 of the out zone unit 800. The position of the out opening 30a can be changed as appropriate. For example, the out opening 30a may be arranged in the upper part of the right game area, or the general winning opening 35 (for example, the general winning opening 35 on the right side). In addition, the out opening 30a may be arranged in the vicinity of the general winning opening 35) integrated with the large winning opening. That is, even if the winning area is not won, the game ball may flow down to the ball discharging unit.
The game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 flows out to the upper effect flow path 820 on the left side or the upper effect flow path 820 on the right side. Specifically, for example, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 passes through the back surface flow path portion (not shown) arranged on the rear surface side of the out zone unit 800 and becomes the base member of the out zone unit 800. It flows out from the provided outlet (not shown) to the upper effect flow path 820 provided on the front side of the out zone unit 800.

The splash member 840 rotates at a constant speed and guides the game ball flowing down the upper effect flow path 820 to the middle effect flow path 830 in the first induction state (in the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 64 and 65). It can be converted into a state (shown) and a second lead state (state shown by a solid line in FIGS. 64 and 65) that leads to the lower effect flow path 850.
The game ball guided to the middle effect flow path 830 by the splash member 840 flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, or falls into the lower effect flow path 850 before flowing into the pseudo winning opening 870. The game ball that has fallen from the middle effect flow path 830 to the lower effect flow path 850 flows into the outflow port 860.
The game ball guided to the lower effect flow path 850 by the splash member 840 flows into the outflow port 860, or is guided to the middle effect flow path 830 by the rotating body 880 that rotates before flowing into the outflow port 860. Will be done.

The game balls that have flowed into the outlet 860 and the pseudo winning port 870 are discharged to the ball discharge unit.
The game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 is configured to flow into the outflow port 860 or the pseudo winning port 870 and be discharged. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 is configured so that it cannot return to the outside (game area 32) of the out zone unit 800.

The rotating body 880 is a disk-shaped member, and is arranged in a state in which the thickness directions substantially coincide with each other in the left-right direction. The rotating body 880 rotates in a certain direction (clockwise when viewed from the right side in the case of this modification) at a constant speed about a rotation axis (not shown) penetrating the center of the rotating body 880.
A plurality of magnets are built in the rotating body 880. This magnet is for attracting (holding in contact with) the game ball in contact with the magnet arrangement location (the location where the magnet is arranged) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 880 to the magnet arrangement location. When the game ball comes into contact with the magnet placement location of the rotating body 880, it is attracted to the magnet placement location and lifted from bottom to top by the rotating body 880 rotating from bottom to top, below the rotating body 880. It is guided from the lower effect flow path 850 located in the above to the middle effect flow path 830 located above the rotating body 880.

Of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 880, from the viewpoint of facilitating the attraction of the game ball to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 880 and suppressing the wobbling of the game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 880. A concave portion may be formed inwardly at a position corresponding to the magnet arrangement portion of the above. Further, instead of a magnet, a ball receiving member such as a plate for lifting a game ball may be provided on the rotating body 880. Further, instead of the rotating body 880, a raising member that operates like an elevator may be provided. That is, the out zone unit 800 may be provided with a member that displaces the game ball.
Further, as shown in FIG. 66, an entry prevention wall 890 (or a plurality of nails) that prevents the game ball from entering the out zone unit 800 from the side of the splash member 840 at a position outside the splash member 840. Or a protruding obstacle member made of resin) may be arranged.

The game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 870 is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). The detection signal of the pseudo winning port switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning port switch detects the game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.
In this modification, the pseudo winning opening 870 is an assist starting port, and when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, the assist symbol effect is executed. Here, the "assist symbol effect" means that a plurality of assist symbols (identification information) are variablely displayed on the sub-display device 41b and then stopped and displayed, and the stopped-displayed assist symbol (hereinafter referred to as "assist stop symbol") is displayed. This is an effect related to the decorative special figure variation display game on the main display device 41a.

67 to 73 are diagrams for explaining the assist symbol effect of this modified example. The assist symbol effect of this modification is composed of an assist symbol variation effect and an assist symbol replacement effect, and is executed by the display device 41 (main display device 41a and sub display device 41b).
First, when the special figure variation display game (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo winning special figure game") that is executed when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 is a special figure variation display game with a reach effect. The assisted symbol effect to be executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68.
When the pseudo winning special symbol game is accompanied by a reach effect, the assist symbol variation effect and the assist symbol replacement effect are executed during the pseudo winning special symbol game.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the first symbol (first special symbol), the second symbol (second special symbol), and the third symbol (third special symbol) in the main display device 41a. ) Is being executed, and if a game ball wins a prize in the pseudo winning opening 870, the assist symbol variation effect of the assist symbol effects is executed. In the assist symbol variation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the variation display of the assist symbol composed of numbers and the like is started in each of the two left and right assist symbol variation display areas of the sub display device 41b, and the variation display is started for a predetermined time. Later, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), the variable display of the assist symbol is stopped, and the assist stop symbol is displayed. In FIGS. 67 to 73, the circle displayed on the upper right of the sub display device 41b is a decorative special figure start memory display (standby hold display) corresponding to the undigested start memory.

In this case, the same reach symbol as the reach symbol derived in the pseudo winning special symbol game is displayed as the assist stop symbol. The reach symbol derived in the pseudo-winning special figure game is, for example, a stop symbol of the pseudo-winning special figure game determined at the start of the pseudo-winning special figure game (step of variable effect setting process (FIG. 77)). It can be specified based on (see C522). Specifically, for example, when the stop symbol of the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning is determined to be "757", "77" is displayed as the assist stop symbol as shown in FIG. 67 (c), for example. NS.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the variation display of two of the first to third symbols (the first symbol and the second symbol in this example) is stopped, and the remaining one (this example). Then, when only the third symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, the assist symbol replacement effect among the assist symbol effects is executed. In the assist symbol replacement effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), for example, the stop of the first to third symbols is displayed. (In this example, the first symbol and the second symbol) are replaced with the assist stop symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 68, "76" is replaced with "77". Then, when the assist stop symbol shifts from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 41a, the assist symbol effect ends and the reach effect is started.
In this way, in the assist symbol effect of this modified example, when the assist stop symbols are aligned in the assist symbol variation effect, it is as if the assist stop symbol assists the occurrence of reach in the subsequent assist symbol replacement effect. I can show you.

Next, in the case where the special figure change game at the time of pseudo winning is not a special figure change display game accompanied by a reach effect, the special figure change corresponding to the undigested special figure start memory when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870. The assist symbol effect executed when the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect is included in the display game will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.
If the special figure game at the time of pseudo-winning does not accompany the reach effect, and the game with the reach effect is included in the undigested special figure variation display game, the assist symbol during the special figure game at the time of pseudo-winning The variation effect is executed, and the assist symbol replacement effect is executed during the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect) that is performed after the pseudo-winning special figure game. That is, one assist symbol effect is executed over a plurality of special symbol variation display games.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 69A, when a game ball wins a prize in the pseudo winning opening 870 while the variable display of the first to third symbols is being executed on the main display device 41a. Of the assist symbol effects, the assist symbol variation effect is executed. In the assist symbol variation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the variation display of the assist symbol is started, and after a predetermined time, the assist stop symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (c), for example.
In this case, as the assist stop symbol, the non-probable reach symbol is displayed among the reach symbols in which the two symbols are aligned. Specifically, for example, the odd-numbered symbols ("1", "3", "5", "7") among the identification symbols are probabilistic symbols, and the even-numbered symbols ("2", "2", "7") among the identification symbols. When "4", "6", "8") is a non-probability variation symbol, "22", "44", "66", or "88" is set as the assist stop symbol.

The reach symbol derived in the special figure variable display game (special figure variable display game with reach effect) performed after the special figure variable display game at the time of pseudo winning is determined, for example, at the start of the special figure variable display game. It can be specified based on the stop symbol of the special figure variation display game (see step C522 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 77)). During the pseudo-winning special figure game, the stop symbol of the special figure variation display game to be performed after the pseudo-winning special figure game is not determined, so that the pseudo-winning special figure game is performed during the pseudo-winning special figure game. In the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game with reach effect) that is performed after the time special figure game, whether the reach symbol of the probabilistic variation is derived (the reach is achieved by the probabilistic variation symbol) or the reach symbol of the non-probability variation It is unclear whether is derived (reaches with a non-probability variation pattern). Therefore, in this modification, in order not to reduce the interest of the game, in this case, a non-probability reach symbol is displayed as the assist stop symbol.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the pseudo-winning special figure game ends, and for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect starts, for example, FIG. 70. As shown in (c), the variation display of two of the first to third symbols (the first symbol and the second symbol in this example) is stopped, and the remaining one (the third symbol in this example). When only the variable display is displayed, the assist symbol replacement effect among the assist symbol effects is executed. In the assist symbol replacement effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), for example, the stop display of the first to third symbols is displayed. The two are replaced with the assist stop symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 71, "76" is replaced with "44". Then, when the assist stop symbol shifts from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 41a, the assist symbol effect ends and the reach effect is started.

Therefore, if the assist stop symbol and the reach symbol derived in the special figure variable display game (special figure variable display game with reach effect) performed after the pseudo-winning special figure game are different, for example, the figure. As shown in 71 (c), the assist stop symbol displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced with the reach symbol derived in the special figure variation display game. In the example shown in FIG. 71, "44" is replaced with "77".
As described above, in the assist symbol production of this modified example, the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning is not accompanied by the reach effect, and the undigested special figure variation display game includes the game with the reach effect. In that case, the assist stop symbols can be left in the same state until the special figure variation display game that is performed after the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning. As a result, it is possible to continue the expectation for the occurrence of reach over a plurality of special figure variation display games, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Next, in the case where the special figure change game at the time of pseudo winning is not a special figure change display game accompanied by a reach effect, the special figure change corresponding to the undigested special figure start memory when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870. The assist symbol effect executed when the display game does not include the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.
If the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning does not involve the reach effect, and the game with the reach effect is not included in the undigested special figure variation display game, assist during the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning. Only the symbol variation effect is executed, and the assist symbol effect ends as it is. That is, in this case, the assist symbol replacement effect is not executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), when a game ball wins a prize in the pseudo winning opening 870 while the variable display of the first to third symbols is being executed on the main display device 41a. Of the assist symbol effects, the assist symbol variation effect is executed. In the assist symbol variation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the variation display of the assist symbol is started, and after a predetermined time, the assist stop symbol is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (c). In this case, as the assist stop symbol, a non-reach symbol in which the two symbols are not aligned is displayed.
After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), when the pseudo-winning special symbol game ends, the assist symbol effect ends, and the assist stop symbol disappears, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (b). Therefore, when the game ball wins the pseudo winning opening 870 again during the special figure variation display game performed after the pseudo winning special figure game, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), a new assist The design production is started.

In this way, in the assist symbol variation effect of this modification, there is a "reach mode" in which a reach symbol in which two symbols are aligned as an assist stop symbol is displayed, and a non-reach symbol in which two symbols are not aligned as an assist stop symbol. There are two production modes, "no reach mode" and "reachless mode". Then, it is possible to notify (suggest) whether or not the reach effect is generated depending on the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect.

[Main processing]
In order to execute the assist symbol effect, the effect control device 300 of this modification executes the main process shown in FIG. 74 instead of the main process shown in FIG. 32.
In the main process of this modification, the assist symbol control process (step C31) is executed between the hall / player setting mode process (step C10) and the random number update process (step C11).

[Assist symbol control processing]
FIG. 75 shows the assist symbol control process (step C31) in the above-mentioned main process. In this assist symbol control process, first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo winning opening switch has detected the game ball (step C401).
When it is determined in step C401 that the pseudo winning opening switch has not detected the game ball (step C401; N), that is, when the gaming ball has not flowed into the pseudo winning opening 870, the assist symbol control process is terminated. do.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C401 that the pseudo winning opening switch has detected the game ball (step C401; Y), that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, the replacement effect standby flag is set. Is determined (step C402).

When it is determined in step C402 that the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C402; Y), that is, the special figure variation display game performed after the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning with the assist stop symbols aligned. If it remains up to, the assist symbol control process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C402 that the replacement effect standby flag is not set (step C402; N), it is determined whether the P machine state is changing in the special figure (step C403).
If it is determined in step C403 that the special figure is not changing (step C403; N), the assist symbol control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C403 that the special symbol is being changed (step C403; Y), it is determined whether or not the assist symbol variation effect among the assist symbol effects can be executed (step C404). Specifically, for example, when the first half fluctuation in the pseudo-winning special figure game is in progress and the remaining time of the first half fluctuation is equal to or more than a predetermined first threshold value, the assist symbol fluctuation effect can be executed. Judge that there is. Here, the predetermined first threshold value can be set as appropriate, but in this modification, the execution time of [1] assist symbol variation effect can be secured (in this modification, the assist symbol variation effect is at the time of pseudo winning. (Starts during the first half fluctuation of the special figure game and ends during the first half fluctuation), [2] Secures processing time to replace a part of the special figure game production with the assist symbol production at the time of pseudo winning. A value that satisfies both of the two conditions that it can be done is set.
The information of the first half fluctuation is included in the MODE, and the effect control device 300 can set the content of the first half fluctuation, the time of the first half fluctuation, and the like based on this MODE.
Further, information on the latter half variation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach is included in the ACT, and the effect control device 300 can set the content of the latter half variation based on this ACT.

If it is determined in step C404 that the assist symbol variation effect cannot be executed (step C404; N), the assist symbol control process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C404 that the assist symbol variation effect can be executed (step C404; Y), the variation during digestion (execution special figure variation display game, here, pseudo winning special figure game). Is a special figure variation display game accompanied by a reach effect (step C405).

When it is determined in step C405 that the fluctuation during digestion is a special figure fluctuation display game accompanied by a reach effect (step C405; Y), the content of the assist symbol variation effect (reach mode) is determined (step C406). .. As a result, the execution time of the assist symbol variation effect, the assist stop symbol, and the like are determined.
Next, the display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed based on the content determined in step C406 (step C407). As a result, the variation display of the assist symbol is started, and the assist symbol variation effect (see FIGS. 67B and 67) in which the assist stop symbol is displayed after a predetermined time can be executed.

Next, the content of the assist symbol replacement effect is determined with reference to the content of the assist symbol variation effect determined in step C406, the content of the effect in the currently set display during digestion, and the like (step C408). From this, the execution time of the assist symbol replacement effect, the replacement timing of the assist stop symbol, and the like are determined. Here, the content of the effect in the digestion variation currently set to be displayed is, for example, the content of the variation effect set to be displayed in step C523 of the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 77) related to the digestion variation, or step C524. The content of the notice effect set to be displayed in step C527, the content of the decorative special figure variation effect (decorative special figure variation display game) set to be displayed in step C527, and the like.

Next, the display setting of the assist symbol replacement effect is performed based on the content determined in step C408 (step C409). As a result, at least a part of the effect of the fluctuation during digestion (special symbol game at the time of pseudo winning) is replaced with the assist symbol replacement effect, so that the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a during the fluctuation during digestion. The assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and the assist symbol replacement effect (see FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (c)) in which the non-reach symbol of the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop symbol can be executed.

Further, when it is determined in step C405 that the fluctuation during digestion is not a special figure fluctuation display game accompanied by a reach effect (step C405; N), the undigested fluctuation (special figure fluctuation corresponding to the undigested special figure start memory) is determined. It is determined whether or not the display game, here, the special figure variation display game performed after the pseudo-winning special figure game) includes the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect (step C410). Whether or not the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect is included in the undigested variation can be determined based on, for example, the read-ahead result from the game control device 100. Here, the look-ahead result is a judgment result of result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory, and is before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. Is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

If it is determined in step C410 that the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect is not included in the undigested variation (step C410; N), the content of the assist symbol variation effect (no reach mode) is determined. Then (step C411), the display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed based on the determined content (step C412). As a result, the variation display of the assist symbol is started, and the assist symbol variation effect (see FIGS. 72 (b) and (c)) in which the assist stop symbol is displayed after a predetermined time can be executed, and the assist symbol replacement effect can be executed. The assist symbol production ends without it (see FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b)).

On the other hand, in step C410, when it is determined that the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect is included in the undigested variation (step C410; Y), the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect is the reachable mode. A reachable mode lottery process (step C413) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to win the lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won (step C414).
If it is determined in step C414 that the prize has not been won (step C414; N), that is, if it is determined that the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect is the non-reach mode, the process proceeds to step C411. As described above, in this modification, even if the undigested variation includes the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect, if the player does not win the reach mode lottery, a pseudo prize is won. During the special symbol game, only the assist symbol variation effect is executed, and the assist symbol effect ends as it is. That is, when the assist symbol variation effect in the reach mode is executed, the assist symbol replacement effect is executed after that, whereas when the assist symbol variation effect in the non-reach mode is executed, after that. The assist symbol replacement effect is not executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C414 that the player has won (step C414; Y), that is, when it is determined that the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect is to be the reach mode, the assist symbol variation effect (reach mode) The content is determined (step C415), and the display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed based on the determined content (step C416). As a result, the variation display of the assist symbol is started, and the assist symbol variation effect (see FIGS. 69 (b) and (c)) in which the assist stop symbol is displayed after a predetermined time can be executed.
Next, the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C417), and the assist symbol control process ends. As a result, in the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game with reach effect) that is performed after the pseudo-winning special figure game, the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a, and the assist stop symbol is displayed. It is enlarged and the non-reach symbol of the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop symbol, and if necessary, the assist stop symbol displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced (replaced with the actual reach symbol). The symbol replacement effect (see FIGS. 70 (c) and 71 (a) to (c)) can be executed.

[Variable command processing]
The received command check process in the main process (see FIG. 74) of this modification is the same as the received command check process (see FIG. 33) of the above embodiment. Further, the received command analysis process in the received command check process of this modification is the same as the received command analysis process (see FIG. 34) of the above embodiment.

FIG. 76 shows a variable command process (step C236) in the received command analysis process. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C501). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set by the above-mentioned symbol-based command processing.
When this special figure type is undecided (step C501; Y), the variable command processing ends. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (step C501; N), that is, if the special symbol type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C502), and the variable command and the symbol type are changed. It is determined whether there is an inconsistency (step C503).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C503; Y), the variable command process ends. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C503; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C504). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 16R probability variation A jackpot symbol, a 16R probability variation B jackpot symbol, a 16R normal A jackpot symbol, a 16R normal B jackpot symbol, and an 8R probability variation jackpot symbol. be. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the effect is as if the deviation command (variation pattern command) was received, but the symbol command of the 16R probability variation A jackpot symbol was received. It means that the combination is inconsistent with the above (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C504), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C505).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C506). Here, "during special map change" means that the special figure is changing (during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or not during fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C507), and the variable command processing is terminated.

[Variable effect setting process]
FIG. 77 shows the variation effect setting process (step C505) in the above-mentioned variation system command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C511). When the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (step C511; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode is set (step C512). Since it is a variation without reach, the symbol type is always a missed symbol, and it is not necessary to refer to the symbol type in particular here.
Here, the effect mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and naturally differs depending on the model, but in this modified example, there are a normal mode, a probability variation mode, a time saving mode, and the like. Further, each mode is provided with a plurality of modes in which the distribution rate of the advance notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41 (main display device 41a) are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of MODE and special figure type is acquired (step C513). As a result, in the case of non-reach variation, it is possible to change the lottery content of the advance notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each advance notice effect mode) that appears during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, the notice lottery that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice distribution group table (step C516).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (step C511; N), the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C514).
Then, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired by referring to the first half notice distribution group address table (step C515), and the first half is changing using the first half notice distribution group table. The notice lottery that appears in is performed (step C516).

Next, a lottery will be drawn for the notice production of the latter half fluctuation. The latter half of the special figure variation display game varies depending on the so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of a plurality of columns of the special figure is a big hit). It is a variable display (a state in which the display is stopped and the variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C517). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half notice distribution group table.
Then, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C518), and during the second half fluctuation (during reach) using the second half notice distribution group table. A lottery for the notice of appearance is performed (step C519).

Next, the content of the effect corresponding to the result of the advance notice lottery performed in step C516 and step C519 is determined (step C520), and the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C521). As a result, the production and notice of the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game and the main reach contents will be determined.
Next, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol constituting the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.) and the notice content of the special figure variation display game (reach effect, etc.). Step C522).

Next, the display setting of the variation effect is performed based on the content of the variation effect determined in step C521 (step C523), and the display setting of the advance notice effect is performed based on the content of the effect determined in step C520 (step C524). .. By these processes, it becomes possible to execute the effect and the advance notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above.
Next, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C525). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decorative special figure start memory display in response to the decrease in the start memory accompanying the start of the special figure variation display game.

Next, a voice number indicating the type of BGM output from the speakers 19a and 19b and a decoration number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp or the like are set (step C526), and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display settings are made (step C527).
Next, apart from the decorative special figure variation display game (variation display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41 (main display device 41a)), the variation displayed by the fourth symbol on the information display device 48. In order to execute the display game, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C528).
Next, the effect replacement process (step C529) is performed to end the variable effect setting process.

[Production replacement process]
FIG. 78 shows the effect replacement process (step C529) in the above-mentioned variable effect setting process. In this effect replacement process, first, it is determined whether or not the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C531).
If it is determined in step C531 that the replacement effect standby flag is not set (step C531; N), the effect replacement process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C531 that the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C531; Y), that is, the special figure change performed after the pseudo-winning special figure game with the assist stop symbols aligned. If the display game remains, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern type is reachable and variable (step C532).
If it is determined in step C532 that there is reach and there is no fluctuation (step C532; N), the effect replacement process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C532 that there is a reach and fluctuation (step C532; Y), the assist stop symbol currently displayed on the sub display device 41b or the latest step C523, C524, C527, or the like is displayed. The content of the assist symbol replacement effect is determined with reference to the set content of the effect (step C533), and the display setting of the assist symbol replacement effect is performed based on the determined content (step C534). As a result, at least a part of the effect set to be displayed in the latest steps C523, C524, C527, etc. is replaced with the assist symbol replacement effect, so that the special figure variation display game performed after the pseudo-winning special figure game ( In the special symbol variation display game with reach effect), the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a, the assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and the non-reach symbol of the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop symbol. If necessary, the assist stop symbol displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced (replaced with the actual reach symbol). Assist symbol replacement effect (see FIGS. 70 (c) and 71 (a) to (c)). ) Becomes executable.
Next, the replacement effect standby flag is cleared (step C535), and the effect replacement process is completed.

In this modified example, when the pseudo-winning special figure game is a special figure variation display game accompanied by a reach effect, it is configured to execute the assist symbol variation effect in the reach mode, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. For example, even when the special figure game at the time of pseudo-winning is a special figure change display game accompanied by a reach effect, the reach-bearing mode lottery process is performed, and when the reach-bearing mode lottery is won, the assist symbol change of the reach-bearing mode is performed. It is also possible to execute the effect, and if the lottery for the mode with reach is not won, the assist symbol variation effect for the mode without reach can be executed.
In addition, the special figure variation display game at the time of pseudo winning is a special figure variation display game accompanied by a reach effect, and the special figure variation display game corresponding to the undigested special figure start memory when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870. If a special figure variation display game with a reach effect is included in the game, the assist symbol replacement effect may be executed during the pseudo-winning special figure game, or after the pseudo-winning special figure game. The assist symbol replacement effect may be executed during the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game with reach effect) to be performed.

Further, in the present modification, even when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the case of this modification, [1] the replacement effect standby flag is not set. Only when [2] the P machine state is changing the special symbol and [3] the assist symbol variation effect can be executed), the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the execution of the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow is suspended, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it is also possible to configure the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow to be executed. Further, when the execution of the assist symbol effect is suspended, the reserved number (assist pending number) may be displayed on the sub display device 41b so as to be distinguishable from the decorative special symbol start storage display.

In addition, the assist symbol effect is not limited to the effect of notifying (suggesting) the presence or absence of the reach effect by the assist stop symbol, and the effect other than the reach effect (SP reach development effect, round promotion effect, pseudo-continuous variation). It may be an effect of notifying (suggesting) the presence or absence of occurrence of (effect, etc.) by an assist stop symbol.
Further, the assist symbol effect is not limited to the effect of notifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of a predetermined effect by the assist stop symbol, and can be changed as appropriate. The assist symbol effect may be, for example, an effect in which the assist stop symbol is reflected in a predetermined advance notice effect executed in a region other than the assist symbol variation display area of the sub display device 41b.

Further, in this modification, the assist symbol effect is executed when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, but the effect executed when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 is limited to the assist symbol effect. However, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, it is possible to execute an effect of operating a predetermined movable body (for example, a splash member 840 and / or a rotating body 880).
Further, a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the case of this modification, [1] the replacement effect standby flag is not set, [2] the P machine state is changing the special figure, and [3] the assist symbol change effect. When a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 in a state where all three conditions that the above can be executed are satisfied, the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow is executed, and the predetermined condition is not satisfied. When a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 in the state, instead of the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow, an effect other than the assist symbol effect (for example, an effect of operating a predetermined movable body) is executed. It is also possible to configure.

It is also possible to configure the game ball to flow into the pseudo winning opening 870 only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, for example, a ball storage device capable of converting into a first state in which game balls are stored and a second state in which game balls are not stored is provided at an appropriate position in the out zone unit 800. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the ball storage device may be converted from the first state to the second state, and the game balls stored in the ball storage device may be configured to flow into the pseudo winning opening 870. It is possible.

Further, in this modification, after the assist stop symbol is transferred from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 41a (see FIGS. 68 (c), 71 (b), and (c)), and before the start of the assist symbol effect. After the end (see FIGS. 67A and 73B), the assist symbol variation display area of the sub-display device 41b is blank (blank), but the present invention is not limited to this. In the assist symbol variation display area after the assist stop symbol is transferred to the main display device 41a or when the assist symbol effect is not executed, for example, the latest assist stop symbol is displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode (for example,). , A lighter color than usual), the default assist symbol (for example, "00" or "---", or the assist symbol when the power is turned on) may be displayed, or "tiger" Character images such as "", "pig", and "cow" may be displayed.

Further, when the model designation command is received, the display (symbol, image, etc.) corresponding to the model designation command may be performed in the assist symbol variation display area of the sub display device 41b. The main display device 41a may display a display corresponding to the model designation command, but since the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed on the main display device 41a, the display corresponding to the model designation command is displayed on the sub display device 41b. It is preferable to display it.
In addition, when the assist stop symbol becomes a predetermined combination (for example, "tiger tiger", "pig cow", "7 tiger", "11", "ream", "storage", etc.), the degree of expectation is notified. Alternatively, the execution / suggestion of the pending change notice, the execution / suggestion of the pseudo-continuous variation effect, the mini-game (notifying the reach occurrence / pending change / pseudo-continuous occurrence depending on the result of the mini-game), and the like may be executed. That is, the assist stop symbol may not act directly on the decorative special figure variation display game of the main display device 41a, but may act indirectly through an effect related to the special figure variation display game. Further, the variable display of the assist symbol may be related to the normal figure game, or may be the normal figure game itself.

Further, in the present modification, the variation display of the assist symbol is stopped (the assist stop symbol is displayed) during the variation display of the first to third symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is shown in FIG. 79, for example. As described above, after the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a (when two of the first to third symbols are stopped and only the remaining one is displayed in a variable manner). It is also possible to configure the variable display of the assist symbol to be stopped (the assist stop symbol is displayed).
Further, in this modification, the assist stop symbols are combined in a predetermined combination to act on the decorative special figure variation display game, but the reverse is also possible. Specifically, for example, a reach occurs in the decorative special symbol variation display game in the main display device 41a, and the reach symbol moves to the sub display device 41b to fit in the assist symbol variation display area of the sub display device 41b. You may. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect using all three 7-segment displays of the main display device 41a. That is, the assist symbol of the sub display device 41b and the decorative symbol of the main display device 41a interact with each other, and a part of the result of the decorative special symbol variation display game (for example, the reach symbol) is the main display device 41a (first display area). ) And the sub-display device 41b (second display area).
Further, the assist symbol effect may be executed not by the sub display device 41b but by, for example, a light emitting device (LED or the like), or may be executed by both the sub display device 41b and the light emitting device (dot LED). ..

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the winning areas (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) In a gaming machine equipped with an out area (out zone unit 800) in which game balls that do not win in the winning area can flow in, a specific game (book) using the game balls that have flowed into the out area in the out area. In the case of the modified example, a specific game mechanism that performs a game (a game of whether or not the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870) and a predetermined effect (in this modified example) when it is determined that the result of the specific game is a predetermined result. In this case, the effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the assist symbol effect) is provided.

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball production) can be played in the out area (out zone unit 800), the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, since the specific game (game ball production) is a production using a game ball that has flowed into the out area (out zone unit 800), it is not a production using a game ball that may win a prize in the winning area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.
The specific game is not a game played in the out area, that is, a game using a game ball that has flowed into the out area, but a winning area (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, first special). It may be a game played in the variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, etc., that is, a game using a game ball that has flowed into the winning area. An example in the case where the specific game is a game played in the winning area, that is, a game using a game ball that has flowed into the winning area will be described in a modified example C described later.

Further, in the present modification, the inlet (inflow port 810) to the out region (out zone unit 800) is the most downstream winning region among the plurality of winning regions (in the case of this modification, the starting winning opening 36). ), And it can be configured so that the acceptance width of the game ball is larger than that of the winning area.
With this configuration, a specific game can be played using a game ball that has no chance of winning a prize. A game ball that does not win a prize in the winning area has no chance of winning, and gives the player an image that is useless or damaged, but by playing a specific game using a game ball that has no chance of winning, It is possible to make it difficult to give such a bad image to the player.

Further, in the present modification, the specific game mechanism includes a pseudo winning opening 870 and a movable member (in the case of this modification, the splash member 840 and the rotating body 880) that guides the game ball to the pseudo winning opening 870. , The movable member (in the case of this modification, the rotating body 880) is provided with a magnet for attracting a game ball, and can be lifted by rotating the game ball attracted to the magnet, and the effect control means (effect control). The device 300) can be configured so that it can be determined that the result of the specific game has reached a predetermined result when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870.

With this configuration, the game ball can be kept in the out area (out zone unit 800) for a long time, so that the interest of the specific game (game ball production) can be enhanced.
Further, since the specific game is a production using a game ball that has flowed into the out area (out zone unit 800) and is not a production using a game ball that may win a prize in the winning area, a prize is won as a specific game. An effect that cannot be performed using a game ball that may win a prize in the area, for example, an effect that lifts the game ball against gravity by a movable member (rotating body 880) as in this modified example. Is possible.
The movable member is not limited to the splash member 840 and the rotating body 880, and can be changed as appropriate. The movable member may be, for example, a ball storage device that can be converted into a first state in which the game ball is stored and a second state in which the game ball is not stored, or a V movable member (in addition, a V movable member included in the type 2 pachinko machine). A movable member that can guide the game ball to a specific region) may be diverted.

Further, in the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) variablely displays a plurality of identification information in the first display area (in the case of the present modification, the main display device 41a) based on the establishment of the start condition. It is possible to execute a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game), and as a predetermined effect, a plurality of variable display areas (sub-display device 41b in the case of this modification) different from the first display area. It is possible to configure the effect of displaying the identification information in a variable manner (assist symbol effect) so that it can be executed.

With this configuration, the game balls that have flowed into the out area (out zone unit 800) can make it appear as if the variable display game has been executed, so that the identification information always fluctuates to the player without wasting balls. It is possible to give an image of playing, and the playability is improved.
In the case of this modification, the main display device 41a is provided with the first display area, and the sub display device 41b is provided with the second display area, that is, the first display area and the second display area are separated from each other. Although it is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first display area and the second display area may be provided in the same display device.

Further, in the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is stopped and displayed in the first display area (in the case of the present modification, the main display device 41a) with a part of the identification information gathered. When a reach state in which the remaining identification information is variablely displayed occurs, a predetermined effect (in the case of the present modification) is set in the second display area (sub-display device 41b in the case of the present modification) before the reach state occurs. , Assist symbol production), stop display with the identification information aligned (see FIG. 68 (a), etc.), and some identification information in the first display area (identification stopped and displayed with the identification information not aligned) Information) can be configured to generate a reach state by replacing the identification information (assist stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the second display area (FIG. 68 (c), etc.). reference).
With this configuration, the identification information (assist stop symbol) stopped and displayed in the second display area (in the case of this modification, the sub display device 41b) can be made to appear as if the reach generation was assisted. It can be done, and the fun of the game is improved.

Further, in the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is the second display area in the variation display game executed before the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in which the reach state occurs. (In the case of this modification, when the sub-display device 41b) is stopped and displayed with the identification information aligned, the identification information is aligned in the second display area until the variable display game in which the reach state occurs. It can be configured to continue displaying the stop display (see FIGS. 69 to 71).
With such a configuration, it is possible to continue the expectation for the occurrence of reach over a plurality of variable display games, so that it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Further, in the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) enlarges and displays the identification information that is stopped and displayed in the second display area (in the case of the present modification, the sub display device 41b). Later, by replacing the identification information that is stopped and displayed in a state where it is not aligned in the first display area (in the case of this modification, the main display device 41a) with the identification information that is enlarged and displayed in the second display area, It can be configured to generate a reach state (see FIGS. 68 (b), (c), etc.).
With this configuration, the identification information (assist stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the second display area is enlarged, and a part of the identification information (non-reach symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the first display area is enlarged. ) Can be skipped (pushed away) to make it appear as if a reach state has been generated, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present modification, after the effect control means (effect control device 300) stops and displays the first display area (in the case of the present modification, the main display device 41a) in a state where some identification information is not prepared. , The second display area (in the case of this modification, the sub-display device 41b) can be configured to stop and display with the identification information aligned (see FIG. 79).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a repechage effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is advantageous for the player when the game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state is provided with a display device (sub-display device 41b) capable of displaying a predetermined moving image and an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling an effect related to the game. The effect control means executes the first effect (for example, the assist symbol effect) on the display device based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 870 of the out zone unit 800). The second effect is executed in response to the fact that the result of the first effect is a specific result (for example, the assist stop symbols are in a predetermined combination), and the result of the first effect is a specific result. The third effect (for example, SP reach effect) may be executed when the number of times is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times.
With such a configuration, an effective effect can be executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 80, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 of the out area (out zone unit 800), the assist symbol effect is executed, and the assist stop symbols are in a predetermined combination. The cumulative image corresponding to the number of times (specific result number of times) is displayed on the sub display device 41b, and the number of times (specific result number of times) that the assist stop symbols are combined in a predetermined number becomes a predetermined number of times or more (for example, n5 times or more). In that case, the SP reach effect or the like may be executed, and the cumulative image may be deleted when the SP reach effect or the like is executed.
In the example shown in FIG. 80, as the cumulative image, a point image showing a value based on the number of times the assist stop symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (the number of specific results) is displayed, and the effect mode of the second effect (cumulative image). The display mode) is "first mode (a mode for displaying a point image of" 100 pt ". See FIG. 80 (b))" → "a second mode (a mode for displaying a point image of" 200 pt "). FIG. 80 (c). ) ”→“ Third aspect (a mode for displaying a point image of “300 pt”. See FIG. 80 (d)) ”→“ A fourth aspect (a mode for displaying a point image of “400 pt”). ) Refer to) ”. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80, the cumulative value switching display effect is executed as the second effect.

As described above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes a predetermined image (cumulative image) to appear on the display device (sub display device 41b) as the second effect, and the result of the first effect is a specific result. It is possible to execute an effect of switching the display mode of the predetermined image according to the fact that (the assist stop symbol has become a predetermined combination), and that the third effect (SP reach effect, etc.) has been executed. The condition may be configured to return the display mode of the predetermined image to the normal display mode (for example, a mode in which the point image is hidden or a mode in which the point image of "0pt" is displayed).
Of course, the predetermined image is not limited to the point image and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the effect of switching the display mode of a predetermined image is not limited to the effect shown in FIG. 80 (the effect of increasing the point value), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a predetermined image may be used as a meter image, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be performed as an effect of switching the display mode of the predetermined image.

When the assist stop symbol is directly acted on the decorative special symbol variable display game (decorative symbol), the player may misunderstand or misunderstand, whereas as shown in FIG. 80, the first effect, the second effect, And by executing the third effect and indirectly acting the assist stop symbol on the decorative special figure fluctuation display game (via media such as images and characters), it is difficult to misunderstand and misunderstand, and the interest is improved. do.

The third effect is not limited to the one executed when the number of times the result of the first effect is a specific result exceeds a predetermined number of times, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be an effect according to the effect mode of the second effect.
Specifically, for example, the third effect is a reach effect. Then, when the effect mode (display mode of the cumulative image) of the second effect at the start of the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect is the first mode, it is used as the third effect in the special figure variation display game. An off-reach effect or a normal reach effect is executed, and in the case of the second aspect, a reach effect equal to or higher than the normal reach is executed as the third effect in the special figure variation display game, and in the case of the third aspect, the special figure. In the figure variation display game, a reach effect equal to or higher than SP reach is executed as the third effect, and in the case of the fourth aspect, the reach effect having a particularly high expectation among the SP reach as the third effect in the special figure variation display game. May be executed.

Further, for example, the third effect is a pending change effect (an effect of changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display), and the display mode (color) of the decorative special figure start memory display is white <blue <yellow <green <purple. Expectations are higher in the order of <red <rainbow, and it is assumed that the normal display mode (normal color) of the decorative special figure start memory display is not a single color but a mixed color or two or more colors. Then, when the effect mode (display mode of the cumulative image) of the second effect at the hold change timing is the first mode, an effect of changing the color of the decorative special figure start memory display to white is executed as the third effect. However, in the case of the second aspect, an effect of changing the color of the decoration special figure start memory display to a color equal to or higher than blue is executed as the third effect, and in the case of the third aspect, the decoration is performed as the third effect. An effect of changing the color of the special figure start memory display to a color of green or higher is executed, and in the case of the fourth aspect, an effect of changing the color of the decorative special figure start memory display to a color of red or higher is performed as the third effect. May be executed.

Further, for example, the third effect is a pseudo-continuous variation effect. Then, when the effect mode (display mode of the cumulative image) of the second effect at the start of the special figure variation display game accompanied by the pseudo-continuous variation effect is the first aspect, the number of pseudo-reams is 1 as the third effect. An effect that is a number of times is executed, and in the case of the second aspect, an effect in which the number of pseudo-reams is two times is executed as the third effect, and in the case of the third aspect, the number of pseudo-reams as the third effect. Is three times, and in the case of the fourth aspect, the effect in which the number of pseudo-reams is four may be executed as the third effect.

Further, even if the alternative effect is executed when the number of lighting (light emitting) character light emitting parts exceeds a predetermined number or when the point value (or meter value) exceeds a certain value. good.
In addition, when the number of lit (light emitting) character light emitting parts exceeds a predetermined number or the point value (or meter value) exceeds a certain value during execution of a special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is a big hit. When becomes, an effect of notifying the number of jackpot rounds (for example, an effect of displaying the number of jackpot rounds in the sub display area 41b) may be performed.

<Modification example C of game board>
A modification C of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82.
FIG. 81A is a view for explaining a main part of the game board 30 of the modified example C, and is a view (front view) seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 82A is a view for explaining a main part of the game board 30 of this modified example, and is a perspective view seen from the front side.
The game board 30 of the present modification basically has the same configuration as the game board 30 of the modification B, and mainly different parts will be described below. The out-zone unit 800 of the modified example B allows game balls that have not won any of the plurality of winning areas provided in the game area 32 to flow in, whereas the out-zone unit 900 of the modified example B has the out-zone unit 900 of the present modified example. The winning game balls can flow into the winning area (in the case of this modification, the starting winning opening 36).

As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 82 (a), the out zone unit 900 forms a start winning opening 36 on the front side of the game board 30 and a pseudo winning opening 900a on the rear side of the game board 30. The winning opening forming member 910, the rotating body 920 arranged behind the game board 30, and the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 (that is, the game ball that flows into the starting winning opening 36 and is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a). The first guide flow path member 930 forming the first guide flow path 930a for guiding the game ball to the rotating body 920 and the game ball lifted from the bottom to the top by the rotating rotating body 920 are pseudo-winning. It includes a second guide flow path member 940 that forms a second guide flow path 940a for guiding to the mouth 900a.
In order to clearly show the first guide flow path member 930, the rotating body 920, and the second guide flow path member 940, some members are omitted in FIGS. 81 (a) and 82 (a). doing. For example, in FIGS. 81 (a) and 82 (a), the illustration of the game board 30 is omitted. Further, in order to illustrate the rotating body 920 in an easy-to-understand manner, in FIG. 81A, a portion of the stage portion 32S that overlaps with the rotating body 920 when viewed from the front is shown by a virtual line (dashed line).

The portion of the game board 30 that overlaps the rotating body 920 when viewed from the front and the stage portion 32S that are rotated when viewed from the front so that the rotating body 920 disposed behind the game board 30 can be seen from the front. The portion overlapping the body 920 has light transmission. That is, at least a part of the game board 30 and the stage portion 32S (specifically, a portion overlapping the rotating body 920 when viewed from the front) is transparent or translucent.

In this modification, the stage portion 32S is a game ball on the stage portion 32S, that is, a game ball guided from the game area 32 outside the center case 40 to the stage portion 32S by the warp flow path portion 43. It is configured to fall only from the front end side of the stage portion 32S. Specifically, the stage portion 32S is inclined forward, for example. Therefore, the game ball can directly flow into the start winning opening 36 provided on the front side of the game board 30 from the stage portion 32S, but the stage portion enters the pseudo winning opening 900a provided on the rear side of the game board 30. It cannot flow directly from above 32S. That is, the game ball on the stage portion 32S cannot flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a without passing through the starting winning opening 36, the first induction flow path 930a, the rotating body 920, and the second induction flow path 940a.

FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the winning opening forming member 910 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), the winning opening forming member 910 is formed to be long in the front-rear direction, the front end portion forms the starting winning opening 36, and the rear end portion forms the pseudo winning opening 900a. ing. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in the winning opening forming member 910, the front end portion (that is, the starting winning opening 36) protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and the rear end portion (that is, the pseudo winning opening 900a) is a game. The game board 30 is pierced back and forth so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the board 30.

That is, in this modification, the starting winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 900a are arranged in front and behind. Therefore, the game ball guided by the second induction flow path 940a actually flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a, but by arranging the starting winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 900a back and forth, for example, FIG. 81 (a). As shown in the above, it is possible to make it appear as if the game ball guided by the second induction flow path 940a wins the start winning opening 36. Further, since the game ball guided by the second induction flow path 940a is a game ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 36, the starting winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 900a are arranged in front and behind to form the starting winning opening 36. It is possible to make it appear as if the winning game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 again.
The member forming the starting winning opening 36 and the member forming the pseudo winning opening 900a do not have to be the same member (winning opening forming member 910). That is, the member forming the starting winning opening 36 and the member forming the pseudo winning opening 900a may be different members.

As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), an opening 911 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the side surface or the bottom surface (the right side surface in the case of this modification) of the front end portion of the winning opening forming member 910. Has been done. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 advances from the inside of the starting winning opening 36 to the outside by passing through the opening 911, and flows into the first induction flow path 930a.
In this modification, only the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 flows into the first guide flow path 930a and is guided to the rotating body 920 by the first guide flow path 930a. Specifically, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down around the out zone unit 900 from entering the first guide flow path 930a, the circumference of the first guide flow path member 930 and the like are not shown. For example, a plurality of obstacle members (for example, protrusion-shaped or wall-shaped members made of resin), nails, and the like are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 82A, the width of the first induction flow path 930a is set to the width at which the game ball flows down in a row from the upstream side (starting winning opening 36 side) to the downstream side (rotating body 920 side). Has been done.
The first induction flow path 930a is inclined so as to descend from the upstream side to the downstream side. That is, a height difference (in the case of this modification, an inclination) is provided on the upper surface of the first lead flow path member 930 so that the upstream side of the first lead flow path 930a is arranged at a higher position than the downstream side. There is. As a result, the game ball can smoothly flow down the first guide flow path 930a (that is, the upper surface of the first guide flow path member 930), so that the ball is clogged in the starting winning opening 36 and the first guide flow path 930a. Can be prevented.
The height difference provided on the upper surface of the first guide flow path member 930 may be a step or the like instead of an inclination.
Further, the first guide flow path member 930 may be arranged behind the game board 30. Further, on the upper surface of the first guide flow path member 930 (that is, the first guide flow path 930a), a ball force suppressing portion (unevenness, protrusion, etc.) for suppressing the ball power of the game ball, and a hole for the game ball in the rotating body 920. A ball guide portion (unevenness, protrusion, etc.) for guiding to the portion may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 82A, the first guide flow path 930a is a substantially L-shaped flow path, and the bent portion is curved so that the game ball can flow down smoothly. The downstream portion (that is, the portion extending in the front-rear direction) of the first induction flow path 930a is arranged in the through hole 30b provided in the game board 30 that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is arranged in the through hole 30b of the first induction flow path 930a. The downstream end reaches the rear surface side of the game board 30. The through hole 30b provided in the game board 30 is formed in a size that allows a game ball flowing down the first guide flow path 930a to pass through. The game ball guided by the first guide flow path 930a advances from the front side to the rear side of the game board 30 by passing through the through hole 30b, and the rotating body 920 arranged behind the game board 30. It flows into the hole of.
Although only the inlet (front end) of the through hole 30b is shown in FIG. 82 (a), the outlet (rear end) of the through hole 30b is substantially the same as, for example, the downstream end of the first induction flow path 930a. It is located on a plane (the plane is perpendicular to the front-back direction).

81 (b) is a view seen from the front side of the rotating body 920, and FIG. 81 (c) is a view seen from the front side of the rotating body cover 950 attached to the rotating body 920.
As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the rotating body 920 is a disk-shaped member, and is arranged in a state in which the thickness directions substantially coincide with the front-rear direction. The rotating body 920 is attached to the rear surface side of the game board 30 by a rotating shaft 921 penetrating the center of the rotating body 920, and is attached to the rear surface side of the game board 30 at a constant speed and in a fixed direction (in the case of this modification, the front side). It is configured to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from.

The rotating body 920 is provided with a game ball accommodating unit 920a capable of accommodating the game ball and a game ball discharging unit 920b capable of guiding the game ball to the ball discharging unit. Specifically, the rotating body 920 is provided with a plurality of holes (eight in the present modification) penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be arranged in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 920. The hole is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and among these holes, the game ball is discharged (specifically, the game ball passes from the front to the rear of the hole). The hole having the discharge control wall 922 on the rear end side forms the game ball accommodating portion 920a, and the hole having no discharge control wall 922 forms the game ball discharge portion 920b.

In this modified example, the number of game ball discharge units 920b included in the rotating body 920 is set to one, but the number of game ball discharge units 920b is not limited to one, and may be a plurality.
Further, in this modification, a part of the plurality of holes of the rotating body 920 is the game ball accommodating portion 920a, but even if all of the plurality of holes of the rotating body 920 are the game ball accommodating portion 920a. good. That is, the rotating body 920 does not have to include the game ball discharging unit 920b.

A transparent rotating body cover 950 that covers the front surface of the rotating body 920 is attached to the rotating body 920. As shown in FIG. 81 (c), the rotating body cover 950 is located at a predetermined first position (in the case of this modification, the lowest position (that is, the 6 o'clock position)) of the holes of the rotating body 920. The game ball is located in a portion facing the hole that has reached and a portion facing the hole that has reached a predetermined second position (in the case of this modification, the highest position (that is, the 12 o'clock position)). It has a passable opening 951.

The rotating body cover 950 is fixed so as not to rotate. That is, even if the rotating body 920 rotates, the rotating body cover 950 does not rotate, and one of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 maintains a state of being arranged at the first position. The other of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 maintains the state of being arranged in the second position.
When the rotating cover 950 is transparent or translucent, a pattern or the like for distinguishing the game ball discharging portion 920b and the game ball accommodating portion 920a may be provided on the front surface of the rotating body 920 or the like. Specifically, for example, a triangular pattern provided on the front surface of the rotating body 1930 shown in FIG. 92 is provided in the vicinity of either the game ball discharging portion 920b or the game ball accommodating portion 920a. Is also good. In this case, since it is easy to understand whether the game ball has flowed into the game ball discharging unit 920b or the game ball accommodating unit 920a, the game ball is said to be said when the game ball flows into the hole portion of the rotating body 92. It is possible to determine whether or not the game ball wins the pseudo winning opening 900a.

The game ball flowing down the first induction flow path 930a passes through one of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 (in the case of this modification, the lower opening 951), and passes through the rotating body 920. It flows into the hole that has reached the first position (in the case of this modification, the lowest position) among the holes that the head has.
Then, the game ball that has flowed into the hole portion of the rotating body 920 passes through the hole portion and is discharged to the ball discharge unit when the hole portion is the game ball discharge portion 920b.
Further, in the game ball that has flowed into the hole portion of the rotating body 920, when the hole portion is the game ball accommodating portion 920a, the rotating body 920 rotates and the hole portion is in the second position (in this modification). In the case of the uppermost position), it passes through the other of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 (in the case of this modification, the upper opening 951) and enters the second induction flow path 940a. Inflow. In this modification, only the game ball lifted by the rotating body 920 (that is, the game ball that has flowed into the game ball accommodating portion 920a) is configured to flow into the second guide flow path 940a.

The rotating body 920 is not limited to holding the game ball by the holes (game ball accommodating part 920a, game ball discharging part 920b), and may be, for example, holding the game ball by a magnet. Specifically, for example, a magnet is built in the rotating body 920, and the game ball that is in contact with the magnet placement location (the location where the magnet is placed) on the front surface of the rotating body 920 is attracted (contacted) to the magnet placement location. The game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement location may be lifted from the bottom to the top by the rotating body 920 (that is, guided to the second induction flow path 940a).

FIG. 82 (c) is a perspective view of the second guide flow path member 940 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 82 (c), the second guide flow path member 940 is a rectangular plate-shaped member, and has an upstream projection 941 projecting rearward toward the upstream end (in the case of this modification, the right end). Is provided, and a downstream protrusion 942 that protrudes rearward is provided at the downstream end (in the case of this modification, the left end). The upstream projection 941 of the second induction flow path member 940 is inserted into the hole portion 952 (see FIG. 81 (c)) provided in the rotating body cover 950 from the front, and the second induction flow path member 940 The downstream side protrusion 942 is inserted from the front into a hole (not shown) provided in a predetermined member arranged behind the second guide flow path member 940. In this way, the second guide flow path member 940 is in a predetermined state (that is, upstream of the second guide flow path 940a) by inserting the upstream side protrusion 941 and the downstream side protrusion 942 into a predetermined hole. With the side arranged at a position higher than the downstream side), it is possible to fix the game ball lifted by the rotating body 920 at a predetermined position (that is, a position where the game ball lifted by the rotating body 920 can be guided to the pseudo winning opening 900a). ..
In addition, on the upper surface of the second guide flow path member 940 (that is, the second guide flow path 940a), a ball power suppressing portion (unevenness, protrusion, etc.) for suppressing the ball power of the game ball and the game ball to the pseudo winning opening 900a A ball guide portion (unevenness, protrusion, etc.) may be provided to guide the ball.

The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 first passes through the opening 911 provided at the front end portion of the winning opening forming member 910 and flows into the first induction flow path 930a.
The game ball that has flowed into the first guide flow path 930a flows down the first guide flow path 930a, and is out of the through hole 30b provided in the game board 30 and the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950. It passes through one of the holes (lower opening 951 in the case of this modification) and reaches the first position (the lowest position in the case of this modification) among the plurality of holes of the rotating body 920. It flows into the hole.

When the hole portion reaching the first position is the game ball discharge portion 920b, the game ball flowing into the hole portion is discharged to the ball discharge unit. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the game ball discharge unit 920b from the front of the game ball discharge unit 920b passes through the game ball discharge unit 920b and is discharged to the ball discharge unit.
On the other hand, when the hole portion reaching the first position is the game ball accommodating portion 920a, the game ball flowing into the hole portion is lifted from the bottom to the top by the rotating rotating body 920. Then, when the hole reaches the second position (the highest position in the case of the present modification), the game ball housed in the hole is out of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950. It passes through the other side (in the case of this modification, the upper opening 951) and flows into the second induction flow path 940a.

The game ball that has flowed into the second lead flow path 940a flows down the second guide flow path 940a and flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), an opening 912 through which the game ball can pass is provided on the side surface or the bottom surface (in the case of this modification, the rear surface) of the rear end portion of the winning opening forming member 910. It is provided. The game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a advances from the inside of the pseudo winning opening 900a to the outside by passing through the opening 912, and is discharged to the ball discharging unit. In this modification, only the game ball that has flowed into the second induction flow path 940a is configured to flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a. That is, only the game balls that have won the starting winning opening 36 can flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a.

As described above, in the present modification, the game ball winning the starting winning opening 36 flows into the game ball discharging unit 920b of the rotating body 920 and is discharged to the ball discharging unit, or the game of the rotating body 920. When it flows into the ball accommodating portion 920a, it flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a and is discharged to the ball discharging unit. That is, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is configured so that it cannot return to the outside (game area 32) of the out zone unit 900.

The game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). The detection signal of the pseudo winning port switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning port switch detects the game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.
Like the pseudo winning opening 870 of the modified example B, the pseudo winning opening 900a of this modification is an assist starting opening, and when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a, an assist symbol effect (see FIGS. 67 to 73) is executed. Will be done. It is also possible to execute the effect shown in FIG. 80 when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a.

The game balls flowing into the out zone unit 900 are not limited to the game balls that have won the starting winning opening 36, and other winning areas (general winning opening 35, ordinary variable winning device 37, first special variation). It may be a game ball that has won a prize in the winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39).
Further, the game ball flowing into the out zone unit 900 is not limited to the game ball that has won a prize in one winning area, and may be a game ball that has won a prize in a plurality of winning areas. Specifically, for example, a flow path for guiding the game ball winning in the normal variable winning device 37 to the first guidance flow path 930a may be provided. In this case, in the out zone unit 900, a specific game is used by using the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 (in the case of this modification, the game ball is the pseudo winning opening 900a). You can play a game of whether or not to flow into.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present modification example, the winning area (in the case of the present modification, the starting winning opening 36) and the inflow area (out zone unit 900) into which the winning game balls can flow into the winning area. In the game machine equipped with, a specific game (in the case of this modification, a game of whether or not the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) is played using the game ball that has won the winning area in the inflow area. When it is determined that the specific game mechanism to be performed (in the case of this modified example, the first guide flow path 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide flow path 940a, and the pseudo winning opening 900a) and the result of the specific game have become a predetermined result. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect (in the case of this modification, an assist symbol effect).

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball production) can be performed in an inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as an out area, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the specific game (game ball production) is a production using a game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), it is not a production using a game ball that may win a prize in the winning area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, a winning area (in the case of this modified example, the starting winning opening 36), an inflow area (out zone unit 900) into which the winning game balls flow into the winning area, and In the gaming machine equipped with the above, a ball effecting mechanism (in the case of this modification, the first induction flow path 930a, the rotating body 920, the second induction flow) that produces an effect using the gaming ball that has won the winning area in the inflow area. A road 940a and a pseudo winning opening 900a) are provided, and the ball production mechanism guides a specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a) into which the winning game balls can flow into the winning area and the game balls winning in the winning area to the specific area. A movable member (rotating body 920 in the case of this modification) is provided.

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as the out area, it is possible to perform an effect (game ball effect) using a game ball that has won a prize in the winning area. In the case of this modification, a specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a) through which the game ball can flow in is provided behind the winning area, and the game ball winning in the winning area can be guided to the specific area. As a production using a game ball that has won a prize in the winning area (game ball production), it is possible to perform a production that makes it appear as if the game ball that has already won in the winning area wins the prize area again. Can be enhanced.

In addition, the production (game ball production) performed in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) is a production using the game ball that has won the prize area, and is not a production that uses the game ball before winning in the prize area. , The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.
That is, the gaming machine 10 of this modified example is configured so that only the gaming balls that have won a prize in the winning region (in the case of this modified example, the starting winning opening 36) can enter the inside of the inflow region (out zone unit 900). .. Specifically, for example, around the first guide flow path member 930, an obstacle member (formed of resin) is formed in order to prevent the game ball flowing down around the out zone unit 900 from entering the inside. (Protrusion-shaped or wall-shaped members, etc.) and nails are arranged.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the movable member (rotating body 920) can be configured to lift the gaming ball by rotating.
With this configuration, the game ball can be kept in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) for a long time, so that the effect of the effect using the game ball that has won the prize area (game ball effect) is enhanced. be able to.

In addition, the effect using the game ball that has won the prize area (game ball effect) is the effect that uses the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and there is a possibility that the game will win the prize area. Since it is not a production using a ball, as a production using a game ball that has won a prize in the winning area (game ball production), a production that cannot be performed using a game ball that may win a prize in the winning area, for example, As in this modification, the movable member (rotating body 920) can be used to lift the game ball against gravity.
The movable member is not limited to the rotating body 920, and can be changed as appropriate. The movable member may be, for example, a ball storage device that can be converted into a first state in which the game ball is stored and a second state in which the game ball is not stored, or a V movable member (in addition, a V movable member included in the type 2 pachinko machine). A movable member that can guide the game ball to a specific region) may be diverted.

《Replay production》
The predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game becomes a predetermined result (that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) is not limited to the assist symbol effect, and can be changed as appropriate. .. The predetermined effect may be, for example, a replay effect (specifically, a revariation effect in the replay effect).
The replay effect is a temporary stop effect in which the decorative special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped in a predetermined result mode (for example, a result mode of deviation) in the middle of the special figure variation display game, and then a predetermined condition is satisfied (. In the case of this modified example, the game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a), and the effect is a re-variation effect of restarting the decorative special figure variation display game that is temporarily stopped. When the replay effect can be executed, the effect control device 300 executes the replay control process shown in FIG. 83 in, for example, the main process (see FIG. 74 and the like).

For example, at the start of the special figure variation display game, a replay effect enable / fail lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the replay effect during the special figure variation display game, and when the replay effect enable / fail lottery is won, the special figure variation display is displayed. Perform replay production during the game.
Specifically, for example, when the content of the variation effect determined in step C521 in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 77 and the like) includes the replay effect, it is determined that the replay effect availability lottery has been won. Then, when the content of the variable effect determined in step C521 includes the content of the replay effect, the display setting of the temporary stop effect in the replay effect is performed in step C523. As a result, the decorative special figure variation display game starts, and after a predetermined time, the decorative special figure variation display game temporarily stops in a predetermined result mode.

[Replay control process]
FIG. 83 shows the replay control process in the main process. In this replay control process, first, it is determined whether or not the temporary stop effect in the replay effect is being executed (the decorative special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped) (step C421).
If it is determined that the temporary stop effect is not being executed (step C421; N), the replay control process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary stop effect is being executed (step C421; Y), it is determined whether the pseudo winning opening switch has detected the game ball (step C422).

When it is determined that the pseudo winning port switch has detected the game ball (step C422; Y), that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning port 900a, the display setting of the revariation effect in the replay effect is performed (step). C423), the replay control process is terminated. As a result, the decoration special figure variation display game that is temporarily stopped is restarted.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo winning opening switch does not detect the game ball (step C422; N), that is, when the gaming ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a, the decoration special figure changes during the temporary stop. It is determined whether the remaining time value of the display game is less than a predetermined threshold value (step C424). Here, the remaining time value of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is a time value from the start of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game to the present time from the predetermined fluctuation time value of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. It is the time value of the difference minus.

When it is determined that the remaining time value of the decorative special figure variation display game during the temporary stop is not less than a predetermined threshold value (step C424; N), the replay control process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time value of the decorative special figure variation display game during temporary stop is less than a predetermined threshold value (step C424; Y), the display setting of the revariation effect in the replay effect is performed (step). C423), the replay control process is terminated. As a result, the decoration special figure variation display game that is temporarily stopped is restarted.

Since the value of the fluctuation time of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is predetermined and the temporary stop time is also counted as the fluctuation time, for example, immediately before the fluctuation time of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game during the temporary stop ends. If the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a, or if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a by the end of the fluctuation time of the decorative special figure variation display game during temporary stop, the game ball The temporary stop of the decorative special figure variation display game cannot be restarted when the game flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a. Therefore, when the remaining time value of the decorative special figure variation display game during temporary stop falls below a predetermined threshold value (step C425; Y), the temporary stop is performed even if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a. The decoration special figure fluctuation display game inside will be restarted.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification changes from the first aspect (for example, the aspect of temporarily stopping the decorative special figure variation display game) to the second aspect (for example, the aspect of varying the decorative special figure variation display game). An effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a switchable predetermined effect (for example, a replay effect) is provided, and the effect control means provides a predetermined effect when a game ball flows into a specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a). Can be configured to switch from the first aspect to the second aspect.
Specifically, the effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect that can be interrupted (for example, a replay effect) is provided, and the effect control means is in a state in which the predetermined effect is interrupted (for example, a decorative special figure variation). When the game ball flows into the specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a) in the state where the display game is temporarily stopped), the predetermined effect can be restarted.
With such a configuration, a replay function using a game ball can be provided, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, when a predetermined effect that can be interrupted (for example, a replay effect) can be executed, the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a only when the decorative special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped, and the decorative special figure changes. When the display game is not temporarily stopped, the game ball may be configured so as not to flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
The configuration can be realized, for example, by rotating the rotating body 920 when the temporary stop is in progress and making the rotating body 920 stand by without rotating when the temporary stop is not in progress. In this case, since the first induction flow path 930a may overflow with the game ball while the rotation of the rotating body 920 is stopped, the rotating body 920 is placed in the predetermined first position (the game ball discharging unit 920b). In the case of this modification, it is preferable to stand by in the state of being in the lowest position).
Further, in the configuration, for example, the specific game mechanism in the out zone unit 900 (in the case of this modification, the first guide flow path 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide flow path 940a, and the pseudo winning opening 900a) is provisionally It is also feasible when the player is configured to be in a pseudo-winning possible state (described later) when stopped, and to be in a pseudo-winning impossible state (described later) when not temporarily stopped.

Further, the predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game is a predetermined result (that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) may be a revival effect.
Specifically, for example, when a battle effect is executed in the final effect of SP reach, the revival effect in which the ally character is revived is started when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a. Is also good. Further, as in the replay effect described above, if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a by a predetermined timing, the revival effect is started even if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning port 900a. It is also possible. Further, a meter for notifying the number of game balls flowing into the pseudo winning opening 900a (for example, the number of game balls flowing into the pseudo winning opening 900a between a predetermined time point and the present time) is displayed, and the level of the meter is set. It is also possible to start the revival production when it reaches the maximum.
By performing such a revival effect, it is possible to increase the added value to the pseudo winning opening 900a, which can be expected to improve the interest.

Further, when the result of the specific game becomes a predetermined result (that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a), the predetermined effect that can be executed is the hold display (decorative feature) displayed on the display device 41 or the like. The display mode of the figure start memory display) may be a hold change effect that changes the display mode to a display mode (hereinafter referred to as “final display mode”) that can suggest a look-ahead result or the like.
Specifically, for example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of displaying the hold display in a display mode (for example, an intermediate mode that glows white) that informs that the hold change effect may be executed, the intermediate mode is used. The trigger for changing the display mode of the hold display displayed in the above to the final display mode may be the inflow of the game ball into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
Further, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the final display mode is determined when the start memory is generated, and a changeability lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode is changed each time the hold display corresponding to the start memory shifts. (Alternatively, it may be a gaming machine that determines the final display mode and the change timing that changes the display mode when the start memory occurs), and a pseudo prize is given rather than the result of the change possibility lottery (or the determined change timing). The inflow of the game ball into the mouth 900a may be prioritized. Further, when it is decided to change the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the start memory a plurality of times up to the final display mode when the start memory is generated, the inflow of the game ball into the pseudo winning opening 900a is triggered. The display mode of the hold display may be changed to the final display mode at once, or the display mode of the hold display may be changed each time the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
Further, as in the case of the replay effect described above, if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a by a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the variation display game based on the start memory that is the target of the hold change effect), the game is played. It is also possible to configure the ball to perform the hold change effect even if the ball does not win the pseudo winning opening 900a.
By performing such a hold change effect, it becomes possible to attract attention to the inflow of game balls into the pseudo winning opening 900a. In addition, since it is possible to enhance the relationship between the inflow of game balls into the pseudo-winning opening 900a and the production, it is expected that the interest will be improved.

In addition, it is also possible to display a specific image (cut-in image, character image, etc.) that informs the expected degree of the variable display game during or before the execution, triggered by the inflow of the game ball into the pseudo winning opening 900a. Is. In this case as well, it can be expected to improve the interest.
In addition, it is possible to stock the execution right of a predetermined effect (for example, a notice effect for a predetermined variable display game), and a predetermined notification image for notifying the stock number of the execution right can be displayed on the display device 41 or the like. In this case, it is possible to display the predetermined notification image when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a. In this case as well, it can be expected to improve the interest.

《Game ball look-ahead production》
It is also possible to notify (suggest) the look-ahead result based on the result of the specific game (that is, whether or not the game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a). That is, it is also possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect (game ball look-ahead effect) using a game ball that has won a prize in the winning area.
In this case, for example, the specific game mechanism in the out zone unit 900 (in the case of this modification, the first induction flow path 930a, the rotating body 920, the second induction flow path 940a, and the pseudo winning opening 900a) is used as the pseudo winning opening 900a. It is configured so that it can be converted into a state in which the game balls flow into the pseudo-winning state (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-winning possible state") and a state in which the game balls do not flow into the pseudo-winning opening 900a (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-winning impossible state"). Further, the effect control device 300 is configured to be able to execute the control of converting the specific game mechanism into the pseudo-winning possible state and the control of converting the specific game mechanism into the pseudo-winning impossible state. Then, by converting the specific game mechanism into a pseudo-winning state, there is a high possibility that the player will be in a state of high expectation (high possibility of reach, high possibility of special result, etc.). By notifying that and converting the specific game mechanism to a pseudo-non-winning state, it is unlikely that the player will be in a state of high expectation (the possibility of reaching is low, and the possibility of a special result will be obtained). Is low, etc.).

As described above, in the game control device 100, when the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) ) Is extracted, and the game result based on the prize is preliminarily determined before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize. The result of this game result pre-determination is the look-ahead result. That is, the look-ahead result is the judgment result of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of the fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory, and the game is played before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

Specifically, as the look-ahead result, for example, a look-ahead symbol command (a look-ahead symbol command including the result of a special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target) and a look-ahead variable command (based on the start memory of the look-ahead target). A look-ahead variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.
The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead advance notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern will be obtained) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be displayed. It is a production that displays the production. The look-ahead command (look-ahead symbol command and look-ahead variable command) is a command that informs in advance a fluctuation pattern or a stop symbol corresponding to the start memory (start memory of the look-ahead target) that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. It is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of starting winning. It should be noted that normal symbol commands and variable commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

Here, when the effect control device 300 receives the look-ahead symbol-based command, the effect control device 300 executes the look-ahead symbol-based command process shown in FIG. 84. Further, when the look-ahead variable command is received, the look-ahead variable command process shown in FIG. 85 is executed.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
FIG. 84 shows a look-ahead symbol-based command process (step C244) in the received command analysis process (see FIG. 34). In this look-ahead symbol-based command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C811).
When the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C811; Y), that is, when the received look-ahead symbol system command is related to the special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. Special figure 1 Saves in the look-ahead symbol command area (step C812), sets the look-ahead fluctuation command reception waiting flag (step C814), and ends the look-ahead symbol command processing.

On the other hand, when the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C811; N), that is, when the received look-ahead symbol system command is related to the special figure 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. Special figure 2 Save in the look-ahead symbol command area (step C813), set the look-ahead fluctuation command reception waiting flag (step C814), and end the look-ahead symbol command processing.
The read-ahead variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C814 because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
FIG. 85 shows a look-ahead variable command process (step C246) in the received command analysis process (see FIG. 34). In this look-ahead variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead variation command is waiting to be received (step C821). Here, when there is a look-ahead fluctuation command reception waiting flag set in the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol system command processing, it is determined that the command is waiting for reception.
If the read-ahead variation command is not waiting to be received (step C821; N), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when waiting for the look-ahead variation command reception (step C821; Y), the look-ahead variation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C822).

After that, in the processes of steps C823 to C826, a pre-reading variation command (pre-reading variation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 is converted so as to be convenient for processing in the effect control device 300.
First, the process of setting the look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of held numbers of the symbols of the latest hold information (step C823) is performed, and the information of the special figure type of the start memory corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation system command received this time and the corresponding A MODE conversion table for converting MODE is set according to the current number of reservations of the special figure type.

Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE corresponding to the look-ahead variation command MODE is acquired (step C824). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (step C825), and the sub-internal look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACT is acquired (step C826).

The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the content and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE change depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of pre-judgment and the special figure fluctuation display game start. The judgment result may differ depending on the judgment of the time. Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the look-ahead notice effect without being affected by the number of holds at the time of determination, the MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of judgment. It is possible to handle in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, non-reach out-of-reach fluctuations that may have a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding situation, and non-reach out-of-reach fluctuations that have a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding situation. It is converted into a MODE classified according to the matters to be considered in the setting of the look-ahead notice effect so that the process of the look-ahead notice effect can be easily and surely performed.

In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, even in normal reach, for example, there are various modes even in the same type of reach, as the final stop symbol is set to stop one frame before the reach symbol, to stop one frame ahead, and to hit. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. Therefore, by converting the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system to the same ACT, the number is reduced, and the processing load such as checking in the processing of the look-ahead notice effect is reduced.

Next, it is determined whether the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C827).
If both MODE and ACT after conversion are not other than 0 (step C827; N), since it is an abnormal command value, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C827; Y), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the number of holds (step C828). A look-ahead command consistency check process (step C829) for determining whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal is performed.

If the command combination is not normal as a result of the look-ahead command consistency check process (step C829) (step C830; N), the look-ahead variable command process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the command combination is normal (step C830; Y), the look-ahead lottery process (step C831) for drawing the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether or not the game ball look-ahead effect is generated (step C832). ).
When the game ball look-ahead effect is not generated (step C832; N), it is determined whether to generate a look-ahead notice effect other than the game ball look-ahead effect (step C834).
On the other hand, when the game ball look-ahead effect is generated (step C832; Y), that is, when the look-ahead notice effect selected in the look-ahead lottery process (step C831) includes the game ball look-ahead effect, the game ball look-ahead effect is supported. The operation to be performed is set (step C833), and it is determined whether or not a pre-reading advance notice effect other than the game ball pre-reading effect is generated (step C834).

When the pre-reading advance notice effect other than the game ball pre-reading effect is not generated (step C834; N), the pre-reading variable command process is terminated.
On the other hand, when a pre-reading advance notice effect other than the game ball pre-reading effect is generated (step C834; Y), the pre-reading advance notice effect (that is, the pre-reading advance notice effect (game ball) selected in the pre-reading lottery process (step C831)) is generated. It is determined whether the pre-reading advance notice effect other than the pre-reading effect)) is an effect that starts immediately (step C835). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 or the like from the present time. In addition, the effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading advance notice effect performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and is an effect or variation that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variation display games. There are effects such as giving a notice by the character appearing during the display, and a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display at a timing later than the present time. As for the timing to start the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game ends and the execution of the next special figure variation display game starts. The timing of the game is applicable.

If the effect is not to start immediately (step C835; N), the look-ahead variable command process ends. In this case, the notice is set at the start of the special figure variation display game for executing the look-ahead notice effect.
On the other hand, in the case of an effect to be started immediately (step C835; Y), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading advance notice effect (pre-reading advance notice effect other than the game ball pre-reading effect) is set (step C836), and the look-ahead variation system. End command processing.

In the look-ahead lottery process (step C831), for example, when the start memory of the lottery target is the first start memory (that is, when the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold), the lottery for the game ball look-ahead effect is performed. It is executed together with a lottery for other pre-reading notice effects. In the lottery for the game ball look-ahead effect, if the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the lottery target is a special result, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the lottery target is not a special result. It is decided to execute the game ball look-ahead effect with a higher probability than in the case (that is, the game ball look-ahead effect is selected). Alternatively, when the reach effect occurs during the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the lottery target, there is a higher probability than when the reach effect does not occur during the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the lottery target. , It is decided to execute the game ball look-ahead effect (that is, the game ball look-ahead effect is selected). Hereinafter, the game ball that generated the start memory of the lottery target is referred to as a "target game ball".

When the look-ahead notice effect selected in the look-ahead lottery process includes the game ball look-ahead effect (step C832; Y), an operation corresponding to the game ball look-ahead effect is set (step C833). When the operation corresponding to the game ball look-ahead effect is set, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo-winning impossible state to the pseudo-winning possible state after the elapse of the predetermined first time, and the conversion After a lapse of a predetermined second time from the game, the specific game mechanism is configured to be converted from a pseudo winning state to a pseudo winning impossible state.

When the out zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is changed as shown in FIG. 86, for example, all the holes of the rotating body 920 are changed to be the game ball accommodating portion 920a. When the discharge control wall 922 provided in each game ball accommodating portion 920a is changed so as to be openable and closable, the specific game mechanism can be converted into a pseudo winning state and a pseudo winning impossible state.
Specifically, the openable / closable discharge control wall 922 can regulate the discharge of the game ball (the game ball passes from the front to the rear of the hole) in the closed state, but is in the open state. It is not possible to regulate the discharge of game balls.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 86A, when the discharge control wall 922 provided in the game ball accommodating portion 920a of the rotating body 920 is closed, the game ball that has flowed into the game ball accommodating portion 920a. Will be guided to the pseudo winning opening 900a by the rotating body 920 and the second induction flow path 940a.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), when the discharge control wall 922 provided in the game ball accommodating portion 920a of the rotating body 920 is open, the game ball that has flowed into the game ball accommodating portion 920a. Will pass through the game ball accommodating portion 920a and be discharged to the ball discharge unit.
That is, by closing all the emission control walls 922 (or the emission control wall 922 provided in the game ball accommodating portion 920a where the target game ball is scheduled to flow in), the specific game mechanism becomes a pseudo winning state. When all the emission control walls 922 (or the emission control walls 922 provided in the game ball accommodating portion 920a where the target game ball is scheduled to flow in) are opened, the specific game mechanism becomes in a pseudo-winning state. In this case, it is possible to switch between the pseudo-winning possible state and the pseudo-winning-impossible state while keeping the movement of the rotating body 920 constant. That is, since it is difficult for the player to determine at first glance whether the pseudo-winning is possible or the pseudo-winning is impossible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even when the pseudo-winning is not possible.

As described above, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo-winning impossible state to the pseudo-winning possible state after the elapse of the predetermined first time, and after the elapse of the predetermined second time from the conversion, It is configured to convert a specific game mechanism from a pseudo winning state to a pseudo winning impossible state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 86, the first time is, for example, a time slightly shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow into the hole of the rotating body 920 after winning the starting winning opening 36, and is the first time. It is preset based on the length of the induction flow path 930a and the like. Further, the second time is, for example, the time required from when the game ball flows into the hole of the rotating body 920 to when it flows into the second induction flow path 940a, that is, the hole of the rotating body 920 is in the first position (this). In the case of the modified example, the time is slightly longer than the time required to move from the second position (in the case of the modified example, the highest position) to the second position (in the case of the modified example), and it is a time that is slightly longer than the time required to move from the second position (in the case of the present modified example), and is in advance based on the rotation speed of the rotating body 920 and the like. It is set.

As a result, for example, at the timing immediately before the target game ball flows into the hole of the rotating body 920 (the timing presumed to be immediately before the inflow), the specific game mechanism is changed from the pseudo-winning impossible state to the pseudo-winning possible state. At the timing immediately after the target game ball flows into the second induction flow path 940a (the timing presumed to be immediately after the inflow), the specific game mechanism is changed from the pseudo-winning state to the pseudo-winning-impossible state. It becomes possible to convert to.

Alternatively, when the out zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is changed as shown in FIG. 87, for example, specifically, the second guide flow path member 940 has a predetermined rotation shaft (for example, an upstream protrusion). It is changed so that it can rotate around 941), and all the holes of the rotating body 920 become the game ball accommodating portion 920a (the game ball accommodating portion 920a having the discharge control wall 922 that cannot be opened and closed). Even if it is changed, the specific game mechanism can be converted into a pseudo winning state and a pseudo winning impossible state.
Specifically, the rotatable second guide flow path member 940 is rotated so that the upstream side of the second guide flow path 940a is arranged at a position higher than the downstream side. The upstream side of the second induction flow path 940a can be converted into a low state on the upstream side arranged at a position lower than the downstream side.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), when the second guide flow path member 940 is in a high state on the upstream side, the game ball flowing into the second guide flow path 940a is on the downstream side (pseudo winning opening). It flows down to the 900a side), falls from the second induction flow path member 940, and flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the second guide flow path member 940 is in a low state on the upstream side, the game ball flowing into the second guide flow path 940a is on the downstream side (pseudo winning opening). It flows down to the side opposite to the 900a side), falls from the second induction flow path member 940, and flows into the out port 30a outside the out zone unit 900 (game area 32).
That is, when the second induction flow path member 940 is converted to the upstream side high state, the specific game mechanism becomes a pseudo winning state, and when the second induction flow path member 940 is converted to the upstream side low state, it is specified. The game mechanism becomes a pseudo-winning impossible state.

As described above, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo-winning impossible state to the pseudo-winning possible state after the elapse of the predetermined first time, and after the elapse of the predetermined second time from the conversion, It is configured to convert a specific game mechanism from a pseudo winning state to a pseudo winning impossible state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 87, the first time is, for example, a time slightly shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow into the second induction flow path 940a after winning the starting winning opening 36, and is the first time. It is preset based on the length of the induction flow path 930a, the rotation speed of the rotating body 920, and the like. Further, the second time is, for example, a time slightly longer than the time required from when the game ball flows into the second guide flow path 940a to when it flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a, and is the length of the second guide flow path 940a. It is set in advance based on the dimensions.

As a result, for example, at the timing immediately before the target game ball flows into the second induction flow path 940a (the timing presumed to be immediately before the inflow), the specific game mechanism is converted from the pseudo-winning impossible state to the pseudo-winning possible state. At the same time as it becomes possible, the specific game mechanism is converted from the pseudo-winning possible state to the pseudo-winning impossible state at the timing immediately after the target game ball flows into the pseudo-winning opening 900a (the timing presumed to be immediately after the inflow). It becomes possible to do.

Further, when the out zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is changed as shown in FIG. 88, for example, the first lead flow path 930a is separated from the support flow path 930b (from the first lead flow path 930a). An opening / closing door 931 is provided at the branch point to the tributary 930b, and all the holes of the rotating body 920 are the game ball accommodating portion 920a (non-openable discharge control wall 922). Even when the game ball accommodating unit 920a) is changed, the specific game mechanism can be converted into a pseudo winning state and a pseudo winning impossible state.
Specifically, the opening / closing door 931 is in a mainstream open state in which the inlet of the downstream portion of the first guide flow path 930a is opened and the inlet of the tributary flow path 930b is closed by rotating, and the first guide flow path. It is possible to convert to a mainstream closed state in which the inlet of the downstream portion of the 930a is closed and the inlet of the tributary 930b is opened.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 88A, when the opening / closing door 931 is in the mainstream open state, the game ball flowing down the first guide flow path 930a is placed in the downstream portion of the first guide flow path 930a. It enters, flows into the hole portion (game ball accommodating portion 920a) of the rotating body 920, and is guided to the pseudo winning opening 900a by the rotating body 920 and the second induction flow path 940a.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 88B, when the opening / closing door 931 is in the mainstream closed state, the game ball flowing down the first lead flow path 930a enters the tributary flow path 930b and leads to the first lead. It falls from the flow path member 930 and flows into the out port 30a outside the out zone unit 900 (game area 32).
That is, when the opening / closing door 931 is converted to the mainstream open state, the specific game mechanism becomes a pseudo winning state, and when the opening / closing door 931 is converted to the mainstream closed state, the specific game mechanism becomes a pseudo winning impossible state. ..

As described above, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo-winning impossible state to the pseudo-winning possible state after the elapse of the predetermined first time, and after the elapse of the predetermined second time from the conversion, It is configured to convert a specific game mechanism from a pseudo winning state to a pseudo winning impossible state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 88, the first time and the second time are set in advance based on, for example, the length of the first induction flow path 930a and the position of the tributary flow path 930b.
Specifically, in the first time, for example, at the timing immediately before the target game ball arrives at the branch point to the tributary flow path 930b (the timing presumed to be immediately before arrival), the specific game mechanism cannot be pseudo-winned. It is set to the time when it is possible to convert from to the pseudo winning state. Further, the second time is, for example, the timing immediately after the target game ball has passed the inlet of the downstream portion of the first guide flow path 930a (that is, the inlet (front end) of the through hole 30b provided in the game board 30). At (timing presumed to be immediately after passing), the time is set so that the specific game mechanism can be converted from the pseudo-winning possible state to the pseudo-winning impossible state.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification has a winning area (in the case of the present modification, the starting winning opening 36) and an inflow area (out zone unit 900) into which the winning game balls flow into the winning area. In the provided gaming machine, a specific game (in the case of this modification, a game of whether or not the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) is played using the game ball that has won the winning area in the inflow area. The mechanism (in the case of this modified example, the first guide flow path 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide flow path 940a, and the pseudo winning opening 900a) and predetermined information (in the case of this modified example, the look-ahead result) are provided in a specific game. It can be configured to include a notification means (effect control device 300) that notifies according to the result of the above.

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, a specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in an inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as an out area, and predetermined information can be notified based on the result of the specific game. Can enhance the interest of.
Further, since the specific game (game ball production) is a production using a game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), it is not a production using a game ball that may win a prize in the winning area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

Further, the game machine 10 of the present modification has a winning storage means (effect control device 300) that stores the winning memory based on the winning of the game ball in the winning area (in the case of the present modification, the starting winning opening 36), and a winning. A game execution means (effect control device 300) that executes a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) based on a plurality of identification information based on the memory, and a variable display game based on the winning memory are executed. A pre-determination means (effect control device 300) for determining before the game is provided, and the notification means (effect control device 300) is configured to notify the determination result (pre-reading result) of the pre-determination means based on the result of a specific game. It is possible.

With this configuration, the pre-reading result can be notified based on the result of the specific game, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.
The predetermined information to be notified by the result of the specific game is not limited to the pre-reading result, that is, the game result of the variation display game before execution (information related to the result of undigested variation), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be the game result of the variable display game being executed (information related to the result of the variable during digestion).

《Game ball storage device》
Further, the out zone unit 900 may include a game ball storage device 960.
FIG. 89 (a) is a perspective view of the out zone unit 900 including the game ball storage device 960 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 89 (b) is a perspective view of the game ball storage device 960 as viewed from the front side. be.
As shown in FIGS. 89A and 89B, the game ball storage device 960 includes, for example, a case member 961 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape, and an opening / closing member 962 for opening and closing the outlet 961b provided on the case member 961. , An opening / closing drive mechanism unit (not shown) for driving the opening / closing member 962 is provided.
The front wall of the case member 961 is provided with an inflow port 961a having a size through which a game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction can pass. Further, on the right side wall of the case member 961, an outlet 961b having a size through which a game ball penetrating in the left-right direction can pass is provided. The arrangement position of the inflow port 961a and the arrangement position of the outflow port 961b can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the outlet 961b may be provided on the bottom wall of the case member 961, for example.

As shown in FIG. 89A, the inflow port 961a of the case member 961 is connected to the rear end of the winning opening forming member 910. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a enters the inside of the case member 961 from the inflow port 961a of the case member 961 by passing through the opening 912 of the winning opening forming member 910, and the case member. It is stored inside the 961.
The case member 961 has light transmission so that the game ball stored inside the case member 961 can be visually recognized from the front. That is, the case member 961 is a transparent or translucent member.

The opening / closing member 962 opened the outlet 961b of the case member 961 as shown in FIG. 89 (a) and the outlet 961b of the case member 961 as shown in FIG. 89 (b). It can be converted into a state. When the opening / closing member 962 is in the open state, the game balls stored inside the case member 961 pass through the outlet 961b and are discharged to the ball discharge unit.
For example, the effect control device 300 converts the opening / closing member 962 from the closed state to the open state when the predetermined opening timing is reached, and closes the opening / closing member 962 from the open state when the predetermined closing timing is reached. It is configured to convert to the state.

Here, the opening timing for converting the opening / closing member 962 to the open state can be appropriately selected. For example, a predetermined time may have elapsed from the closing timing, or the opening / closing member 962 is stored inside the case member 961. It may be when the number of game balls in the game exceeds a predetermined threshold value, or when the player operates the operating means (for example, the effect button 25) in a predetermined operation mode, or when the player operates the operation means (for example, the effect button 25) in a predetermined operation mode. It may be at the start (or end) of, or at the start (or end) of the variable display game. The number of game balls stored inside the case member 961 can be determined, for example, by counting the number of times the pseudo winning opening switch detects the game balls.
Further, the closing timing for converting the opening / closing member 962 to the closed state can be appropriately selected, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening timing. The predetermined time is, for example, a time slightly longer than the time required to eject all the game balls in the case member 961 when the inside of the case member 961 is full of game balls, and the size of the case member 961. It is set in advance based on the shape and shape.

In this way, the out zone unit 900 is provided with the game ball storage device 960, and the game balls that have flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a are stored inside the case member 961 to store the game balls that have won the starting winning opening 36. Can be made to be felt by the player.
From the viewpoint of storing all the game balls that have won the starting winning opening 36 inside the case member 961, it is preferable that all the holes of the rotating body 920 are the game ball accommodating portions 920a.

《Starting winning unit》
Instead of the out zone unit 900, a start winning unit 360 may be provided. That is, in the game board 30 of the present modification, the start winning unit 360 including the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) and the pseudo winning opening 360a is arranged above the out opening 30a. You may be.

FIG. 90 is a view for explaining a main part of the game board 30 of the game machine 10 including the start winning unit 360, and is a view (front view) seen from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 90, the start winning unit 360 is attached to, for example, a substantially plate-shaped base member 361, a passage opening forming member 362 attached to the upper portion of the base member 361, and a substantially central portion of the base member 361. It is configured to include a rotating body 363.
Pseudo-winning openings 360a are provided on the left and right sides of the rotating body 363 in the base member 361. Further, an outflow port 364 is provided above the rotating body 363 in the base member 361 and below the passage port forming member 362.

The passage port forming member 362 forms a passage port 362a that opens toward the upper portion (stage portion 32S). The game ball that has flowed into the passage port 362a passes through, for example, a back surface flow path (not shown) arranged on the rear surface side of the base member 361, and from the outlet 364 provided in the base member 361 to the base member 361. It flows out to the front side (that is, inside the starting winning unit 360).
The passage port 362a has a shape that looks like a normal start port. As a result, the game ball that has actually entered the inside of the starting winning unit 360 can win a prize in the starting winning opening 36, but by making the passing opening 362a look like a normal starting opening, the starting opening (for example, It is possible to make it appear as if the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36) enters the inside of the starting winning unit 360.

A rib-shaped left extending wall 365 and a right extending wall 366 extending forward are provided on the front surface side of the base member 361.
The left extending wall 365 forms a guiding flow path that guides the game ball flowing out from the outflow port 364 to the pseudo winning opening 360a on the left side.
Further, the right extending wall 366 forms a guiding flow path that guides the game ball flowing out from the outflow port 364 to the pseudo winning opening 360a on the right side.

Further, the left extending wall 365 and the right extending wall 366 also have a function of preventing the game ball flowing down around the starting winning unit 360 from entering the inside of the game ball. Specifically, the inside of the start winning unit 360 is surrounded by a passage opening forming member 362, a rotating body 363, a left extension wall 365, and a right extension wall 366, whereby the inside of the start winning unit 360 flows into the passage port 362a. It prevents game balls other than game balls from entering the inside of the starting winning unit 360. That is, only the game ball that has flowed into the passage port 362a can enter the inside of the starting winning unit 360.
It is preferable that at least the portion of the front surface of the base member 361 surrounded by the passage opening forming member 362, the rotating body 363, the left extending wall 365, and the right extending wall 366 is decorated. ..

The rotating body 363 has, for example, a shape in which a disk member is provided with a recess in which a part of the outer peripheral surface of the disk member is recessed toward the center, and a start winning opening 36 is formed in the recess. There is. The rotating body 363 is configured to rotate left and right at a constant speed. The rotating body 363 may be configured to rotate at a constant speed in a constant direction (for example, in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front side).
By rotating the rotating body 363 to the left and right, the game ball flowing out from the outlet 364 can be converted into a winning state in which the starting winning opening 36 can be won and a winning state in which it is difficult (or impossible) to win. Is.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 91A, a state in which the starting winning opening 36 faces the outlet 364 is a winning state.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the starting winning opening 36 faces the pseudo winning opening 360a on the left side, or as shown in FIG. 91 (c), for example, the starting winning opening 36 is the pseudo winning opening on the right side. The state facing 360a is a state in which it is difficult to win a prize. When the game ball flowing out from the outflow port 364 cannot flow into the starting winning opening 36, such as when the rotating body 363 is in a difficult-to-win state, the game ball is placed in the pseudo winning opening 360a on the left side or the pseudo winning opening on the right side. It will flow into 360a.

The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 (that is, the game ball that has flowed into the starting winning opening 36 and is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a) is discharged to the ball ejection unit.
In addition, the game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 360a is also discharged to the ball discharge unit. The game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 360a is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). The detection signal of the pseudo winning port switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning port switch detects the game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.

In this way, the starting winning unit 360 can internally distribute the game ball flowing into the passing opening 362a into the starting winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 360a, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 360a (that is, when the starting winning opening 36 is not won), the game ball does not win the starting winning opening 36 in order to execute a predetermined effect. It is possible to reduce the disappointment and loss of the player.
The inside of the start winning unit 360 can be visually recognized from the front.

Further, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning port 360a (that is, when the detection signal of the pseudo winning port switch is output to the effect controlling device 300), the effect control device 300 provides a predetermined effect (pseudo winning port). The effect memory, which is the execution right of the effect (effect executed when the game ball flows into 360a), may be stored, and the number of undigested effect memories may be displayed. The number of undigested production memories is preferably displayed so as to be distinguishable from the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the undigested start memory.

<< Modification example of out zone unit >>
The out-zone unit disposed above the out-port 30a and having a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) and a pseudo winning opening is limited to the out-zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82. However, it can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, the out zone unit 1900 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 92, the out zone unit 1900 is attached to, for example, a substantially plate-shaped base member 1910, a distribution member 1920 attached to the upper part of the base member 1910, and a substantially central portion of the base member 1910. It includes a rotating body 1930 and a ball rolling member 1940 attached to the right side of the base member 1910.
A starting winning opening 36 is provided above the distribution member 1920 in the base member 1910, and a pseudo winning opening 1900a is provided below the ball rolling member 1940 in the base member 1910. Further, an upper out port 1911 is provided behind the distribution member 1920 in the base member 1910, and a lower out port 1912 is provided below the rotating body 1930 in the base member 1910. Further, an outflow port 1913 is provided above the distribution member 1920 in the base member 361 and below the start winning opening 36.

The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 passes through, for example, a back surface flow path (not shown) arranged on the rear surface side of the base member 1910, and from the outlet 1913 provided in the base member 1910 to the base member 1910. It flows out to the front side (that is, inside the out zone unit 1900).

On the front side of the base member 1910, a rib-shaped left outer extension wall 1951, a left inner extension wall 1952, a right outer extension wall 1953, a right inner extension wall 1954, and an entry prevention wall 1955 are provided. It is provided.
The left outer extension wall 1951 and the left inner extension wall 1952 form a guide flow path that guides the game ball that flows out from the outflow port 1913 and is distributed to the left side by the distribution member 1920 to the lower out port 1912. ing.
Further, the right outer extending wall 1953 and the right inner extending wall 1954 provide an guiding flow path that guides the game ball that flows out from the outflow port 1913 and is distributed to the right by the distribution member 1920 to the ball rolling member 1940. Is forming.

Further, the entry prevention wall 1955, together with the left outer extension wall 1951 and the right outer extension wall 1953, prevents the entry of the game ball flowing down around the out zone unit 1900 into the inside. Specifically, the inside of the out zone unit 1900 is surrounded by a left outer extension wall 1951, a right outer extension wall 1953, and an entry prevention wall 1955, whereby a game ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 36. It prevents game balls other than the above from entering the inside of the out zone unit 1900. That is, only the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 can enter the inside of the out zone unit 1900.

The distribution member 1920 is, for example, a substantially V-shaped member having a recess 1921, and the recess 1921 can receive a game ball. The distribution member 1920 is configured to rotate left and right at a constant speed about the rotation shaft 1922.
By rotating left and right, the distribution member 1920 wins a prize in the start winning opening 36, receives the game ball flowing out from the outflow port 1913 at the recess 1921, and distributes it to the rear side (upper out port 1911). And, the left distribution state in which the game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 and has flowed out from the outlet 1913 is distributed to the left side, and the right swing in which the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out from the outlet 1913 is distributed to the right side. It can be converted into a minute state.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 93A, the state in which the recess 1921 faces upward (starting winning opening 36) is the back distribution state. When the distribution member 1920 is in the rear distribution state, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out from the outlet 1913 is received by the recess 1921 of the distribution member 1920 and formed behind the distribution member 1920. It flows into the upper out port 1911 and is discharged to the ball discharge unit.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 93B, the state in which the recess 1921 faces to the right is the left distribution state. When the distribution member 1920 is in the left distribution state, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out from the outlet 1913 is the left side surface of the distribution member 1920, the left outer extension wall 1951, and the left inner extension wall. It is guided by 1952 to the lower out port 1912. The game ball that has flowed into the lower out port 1912 is discharged to the ball discharge unit.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the state in which the recess 1921 faces to the left is the right distribution state. When the distribution member 1920 is in the right distribution state, the game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 and has flowed out from the outlet 1913 is the right side surface of the distribution member 1920, the right outer extension wall 1953, and the right inner extension wall. It is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 by 1954. The game ball guided to the ball rolling member 1940 flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a via the ball rolling member 1940 and is discharged to the ball discharging unit.

The rotating body 1930 is a disk-shaped member, and is arranged in a state in which the thickness direction substantially coincides with the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10. The rotating body 1930 rotates at a constant speed in a constant direction (in this example, a clockwise direction when viewed from the front side).
A magnet is built in the rotating body 1930. This magnet is for attracting (holding in contact with) the game ball in contact with the magnet arrangement location (the location where the magnet is arranged) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1930. When the game ball comes into contact with the magnet placement location of the rotating body 1930, it is attracted to the magnet placement location, lifted from the bottom to the top by the rotating rotating body 1930, and guided to the ball rolling member 1940.

Therefore, if the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 is attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 before flowing into the lower out port 1912, it does not flow into the lower out port 1912. , Is guided to the ball rolling member 1940.
On the other hand, the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 flows into the lower out port 1912 if it is not attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the rotating body 1930 has only one magnet arrangement location (specifically, the location indicated by the triangular pattern on the front surface of the rotating body 1930). There may be a plurality of locations.

The ball rolling member 1940 is a circular dish-shaped member, which is a so-called crune, and the upper surface is an inclined surface that descends toward the center. A communication hole 1941 is formed so as to flow down to 1900a. The game ball that has flowed into the ball rolling member 1940 gradually flows down to the center while rotating, and flows down from the communication hole 1941 to the pseudo winning opening 1900a.

The game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 1900a is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). The detection signal of the pseudo winning port switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning port switch detects the game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect. As the predetermined effect, for example, an effect in which a fiery heat character or a group of characters appears is executed.

Whether or not the effect control device 300 performs a distribution effect of rotating the distribution member 1920, for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36, using the start memory stored based on the winning as a lottery target. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not the distribution will be produced. This distribution effect is a kind of pre-reading notice effect, and in the distribution effect availability lottery, for example, when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the lottery target is a special result, the start of the lottery target. It is now determined that the distribution effect is executed with a higher probability than when the result of the special figure variation display game based on memory is not a special result. That is, it can be said that the distribution production is a production with a high degree of expectation (big hit expectation).
As the distribution effect, a left distribution weak effect, a left distribution strong effect, and a right distribution effect are set. The expected value increases in the order of, for example, left distribution weak effect <right distribution effect <left distribution strong effect.

For example, the distribution member 1920 rotates only during the distribution effect, and maintains the initial state (post-distribution state) at other times. Therefore, when it is decided not to execute the distribution effect in the distribution effect availability lottery, the game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 and has flowed out from the outlet 1913 is received by the recess 1921 of the distribution member 1920. And flows into the upper out port 1911.
On the other hand, when the execution of the right distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect availability lottery, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to change the distribution member 1920 from the initial state (rear distribution state) to the right distribution state. Convert to. As a result, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out from the outlet 1913 is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a.

In addition, when it is decided to execute the left distribution strong effect in the distribution effect availability lottery, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to distribute left from the initial state (rear distribution state). Convert to state. As a result, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out from the outflow port 1913 is guided to the lower out opening 1912. For example, the rotating body 1930 rotates only when the left swing strong effect is produced, and does not rotate at other times. Therefore, when the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 in the left distribution strong effect is attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 that rotates before flowing into the lower out port 1912, the rotation is concerned. It is guided by the body 1930 to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a. On the other hand, if it is not attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 before flowing into the lower out port 1912, it flows into the lower out port 1912. In this way, in the left-handed distribution strong production, it is possible to perform a repechage effect such that a game ball that may have flowed into the lower out port 1912 flows into the pseudo winning port 1900a. The interest is improved.

Further, when it is decided to execute the left distribution weak effect in the distribution effect availability lottery, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to distribute the left distribution from the initial state (rear distribution state). Convert to state. As a result, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out from the outflow port 1913 is guided to the lower out opening 1912. The rotating body 1930 is in a state in which the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 cannot be attracted to the magnet placement location (for example, the magnet placement location faces the upper side (opposite to the lower out port 1912)) while the rotation is stopped. The state where it was) is maintained. Therefore, the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 in the left swing weakening effect does not attract to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930, but flows into the lower out port 1912.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 provided with the out-zone unit 1900, the specific game (for example, the game ball winning the winning area (for example, the starting winning opening 36) is used in the inflow area (out-zone unit 1900). For example, a guide flow path formed by a specific game mechanism (for example, left outer extension wall 1951 and left inner extension wall 1952) for performing a game of whether or not a game ball flows into a pseudo winning opening 1900a, right outer extension. The guidance flow path formed by the exit wall 1953 and the right inner extension wall 1954, the distribution member 1920, the rotating body 1930, the ball rolling member 1940, and the pseudo winning opening 1900a), and the result of the specific game is said to be a predetermined result. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a fiery heat character or a group of characters appears) when a determination is made.

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball production) can be played in an inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the specific game (game ball production) is a production using a game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), it is not a production using a game ball that may win a prize in the winning area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 provided with the out zone unit 1900, it is possible to configure the gaming machine 10 to include a notification means (effect control device 300) for notifying predetermined information (for example, a look-ahead result) according to the result of a specific game.
The results of the specific game referred to here are, for example, "the game ball has flowed into the upper out port 1911 (that is, the distribution effect has not been executed)" and "the game ball is distributed to the left side and the lower side out. It flowed into the mouth 1912 (that is, the left distribution weak effect was executed) "," The game ball was distributed to the left side and flowed into the pseudo winning opening 1900a (that is, the left distribution strong effect was executed) ". , "The game ball is distributed to the right side and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a (that is, the right distribution effect is executed)".

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, a specific game (game ball production) can be performed in an inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, and predetermined information can be notified based on the result of the specific game. Can enhance the interest of.
Further, since the specific game (game ball production) is a production using a game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), it is not a production using a game ball that may win a prize in the winning area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

<Modification example of distribution production>
Here, a modified example of the distribution effect of rotating the distribution member 1920 is shown. Specifically, an example is shown in which the currently set probability setting value and the jackpot history are suggested depending on the effect mode of the distribution effect.
As described above, as the distribution effect, the left distribution weak effect (left distribution weak mode distribution effect), the left distribution strong effect (left distribution strong mode distribution effect), and the right distribution effect (right). Sorting effect of sorting mode) is set. That is, there are a weak left distribution mode, a strong left distribution mode, and a right distribution mode as the effect mode of the distribution effect. The expected value (expected degree of jackpot, etc.) is higher in the order of, for example, left distribution weak effect <right distribution effect <left distribution strong effect. That is, in the above-mentioned distribution effect, the expected value (big hit expectation degree, etc.) can be suggested depending on the effect mode of the distribution effect.

The information that can be suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect is not limited to the expected value and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be a probability setting value currently set.
Specifically, for example, when the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 with the start memory stored based on the winning as a lottery target. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not to perform the distribution effect.
For example, the distribution member 1920 rotates only during the distribution effect, and maintains the initial state (post-distribution state) at other times. Therefore, if the lottery for whether or not the distribution effect is possible is not won (when it is decided not to execute the distribution effect in the lottery for whether or not the distribution effect is possible), the game ball that wins the start winning opening 36 and flows out from the outlet 1913. Is received by the recess 1921 of the distribution member 1920 and flows into the upper out port 1911.

On the other hand, when the lottery for whether or not the distribution effect is possible is won (when the execution of the distribution effect is determined in the lottery for whether or not the distribution effect is possible), the effect control device 300 distributes based on the currently set probability set value. The effect mode of the minute effect is determined, and the distribution effect is executed in the determined effect mode.
For example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the currently set probability setting value is "3" or "4", the distribution effect of the right distribution mode (right distribution effect) is executed. NS. Specifically, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to convert from the initial state (post-distribution state) to the right distribution state. As a result, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out from the outlet 1913 is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a. That is, in this case, the right flow path (the induction flow path formed by the right outer extension wall 1953 and the right inner extension wall 1954) is selected as the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the out zone unit 1900 passes. ..

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the currently set probability setting value is "5" or "6", the distribution effect of the left distribution strong mode (left distribution strong effect). ) Is executed. Specifically, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to convert from the initial state (post-distribution state) to the left distribution state. As a result, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out from the outflow port 1913 is guided to the lower out opening 1912. For example, the rotating body 1930 rotates only when the left swing strong effect is produced, and does not rotate at other times. Therefore, when the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 in the left distribution strong effect is attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 that rotates before flowing into the lower out port 1912, the rotation is concerned. It is guided by the body 1930 to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a. On the other hand, if it is not attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 before flowing into the lower out port 1912, it flows into the lower out port 1912. That is, in this case, as a flow path through which the game ball flowing into the out zone unit 1900 passes, a flow path with left rotation (a guided flow formed by a left side flow path (left outer extension wall 1951 and left inner extension wall 1952). Road) + rotating body 1930 with rotation) is selected.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the currently set probability setting value is "1" or "2", the distribution effect of the left distribution weak mode (left distribution weak effect). ) Is executed. Specifically, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to convert from the initial state (post-distribution state) to the left distribution state. As a result, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out from the outflow port 1913 is guided to the lower out opening 1912. The rotating body 1930 is in a state in which the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 cannot be attracted to the magnet placement location (for example, the magnet placement location faces the upper side (opposite to the lower out port 1912)) while the rotation is stopped. The state where it was) is maintained. Therefore, the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 in the left swing weakening effect does not attract to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930, but flows into the lower out port 1912. That is, in this case, as the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the out zone unit 1900 passes, the left side non-rotating flow path (the guided flow formed by the left side flow path (left outer extension wall 1951 and left inner extension wall 1952). Road) + no rotation of rotating body 1930) is selected.

Thereby, by executing the distribution effect, it can be suggested that the lottery for whether or not the distribution effect is possible is won (that is, the probability of big hit is higher than the case where the lottery for whether or not the distribution effect is not won is not won). At the same time, it is possible to suggest the currently set probability setting value depending on the effect mode of the distribution effect.
The flow path selected as the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the out zone unit 1900 passes (hereinafter referred to as “out ball passage flow path”) differs depending on the production mode of the distribution effect. Therefore, in the case of this modification, it can be said that the currently set probability setting value can be suggested by the selected out-ball passage flow path.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is selected in the inflow region (out zone unit 1900) by using the gaming ball that has won the winning region (for example, the starting winning opening 36). A specific game mechanism (for example, a guide flow path formed by the left outer extension wall 1951 and the left inner extension wall 1952) and a right flow path that perform a game of which out-ball passage path is. (Induction flow path formed by the right outer extending wall 1953 and the right inner extending wall 1954), the distribution member 1920, and the rotating body 1930).

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball production) can be played in an inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the specific game (game ball production) is a production using a game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), it is not a production using a game ball that may win a prize in the winning area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification can be configured to include a notification means (effect control device 300) that notifies predetermined information (for example, a currently set probability setting value) according to the result of a specific game.
The results of the specific game referred to here are, for example, "the selected out-ball passage is a" left-side rotation-free flow path "" and "the selected out-ball passage is a" right-hand flow path "". "Yes" or "The selected out-ball passage is a" flow path with left-hand rotation "".
Therefore, a specific game (game ball production) can be performed in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as the out area, and predetermined information can be notified according to the result of the specific game, which enhances the interest of the game. be able to.
The inflow area is not limited to the out zone unit 1900 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the out zone unit 800 may be used, the out zone unit 900 may be used, or the starting winning unit 360 may be used. You may.

Further, the selectivity of the flow path corresponding to the currently set probability set value does not have to be 100%. That is, the flow path that does not correspond to the probability set value may be selectable, and the selection rate of the flow path that corresponds to the probability set value may be higher than the selection rate of the flow path that does not correspond to the probability set value. ..
Specifically, for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 94 (a), the flow path corresponding to the probability setting value “3” or “4” is the right side flow path, and the non-corresponding flow path is the left side non-rotating flow path. In that case, not only the right side flow path but also the left side rotationless flow path and the left side rotation flow path can be selected, and the selectivity of the left side rotationless flow path and the left side rotation flow path can be selected. It may be configured so that the selectivity of the right flow path is higher than the selectivity of. In this configuration, the player can infer that the currently set probability setting value is "3" or "4" based on the tendency that the right flow path is easily selected. .. Other probability setting values can be configured in the same manner. Therefore, even in such a configuration, the probability setting value currently set can be suggested by the selected out-ball passing flow path (that is, the effect mode of the distribution effect).

Further, the information suggested by the selected out-ball passing flow path (that is, the information suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect) is not limited to the currently set probability setting value, and can be changed as appropriate.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the jackpot history may be suggested by the selected out-ball passing flow path. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 94 (b), the player considers that the selected out-ball passing flow path is the “left-side rotation-free flow path” (or the “left-side rotation-free flow path” is most likely to be selected). It can be estimated that the cumulative value of the number of big hits is less than 15 times, and when the selected out-ball passing flow path is the "right side flow path" (or the "right side flow path" is most likely to be selected. In the case), it can be estimated that the cumulative value of the number of jackpots is 15 or more and less than 30 times, and the selected out-ball passing flow path is the “left-side rotation flow path” (or “left-side rotation”). It can be estimated that the cumulative value of the jackpot is 30 times or more in the case where the “existing flow path” is most likely to be selected). Of course, the jackpot history suggested by the selected out-ball passage channel is not limited to the cumulative value of the number of jackpots (the total number of occurrences of special gaming states from a predetermined time point to the present time) and can be changed as appropriate. , The cumulative value of the number of consecutive chans (the total value of the number of consecutive chans from a predetermined time point to the present time) may be used.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a special gaming state is generated. In a possible game machine, a plurality of flow paths through which the game ball can pass (for example, a flow path without left rotation, a flow path on the right side, and a flow path with left rotation) and predetermined information (for example, a currently set probability setting value). Selection means (effect control device 300) for selecting a flow path through which the game ball passes from among a plurality of flow paths, and switching means (distribution member 1920) for switching the flow path according to the selection result of the selection means. , Rotating body 1930).
Therefore, predetermined information can be suggested by the flow path through which the game ball passes. That is, since it is possible to perform an effect that suggests predetermined information as an effect using the game ball, it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the game ball.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, a setting means (setting means capable of setting one probability setting value from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game (special figure variation display game) are assigned. The game control device 100) is provided, and the predetermined information can be configured to be a probability setting value (currently set probability setting value) set by the setting means (see FIG. 94 (a)).
With this configuration, as an effect using the game ball, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the probability setting value (currently set probability setting value) set by the setting means, so that the game ball can be used. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production used.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the predetermined information can be configured to be history information (big hit history) related to the special result (see FIG. 94 (b)).
With this configuration, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests history information (big hit history) regarding the special result as an effect using the game ball, so that the interest of the effect using the game ball can be enhanced.

The predetermined information is not limited to the probability setting value (currently set probability setting value) set by the setting means and the history information (big hit history) related to the special result. The predetermined information may be, for example, a base value or an accessory ratio. Here, the base value is paid out based on the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the winning in the winning area. The value calculated from the number and necessary for displaying the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected by the out switch and information on the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. .. In addition, the bonus ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the prize opening from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present, during the jackpot state (that is, fanfare and ending). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by character) obtained by winning the big prize opening (excluding the inside) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information necessary to display the character ratio. Includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by character).

Further, for example, below the normal symbol start gate 34, a plurality of guidance channels capable of guiding the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (or the general winning opening 35), a constantly rotating distribution member, and a game. A switching means (for example, an induction valve) for switching the induction flow path through which the sphere passes is provided in the plurality of induction flow paths, and the induction flow path is set according to predetermined information (for example, a currently set probability setting value). It may be configured to switch. Specifically, for example, in the plurality of guidance flow paths, an advantageous guidance flow path in which the game ball is easily guided to the start winning opening 36 (or the general winning opening 35) and a game ball are introduced to the starting winning opening 36 (or the general winning opening 35). There is an unfavorable guide flow path that is difficult to be guided to the general winning opening 35), and the switching means is an opening / closing member that opens and closes the inlet of each of the guide flow paths provided in the plurality of guide flow paths, and normally starts with a symbol. The game ball that has passed through the gate 34 is guided to a plurality of guidance flow paths by the distribution member, and is selected from the plurality of guidance flow paths whose inlet is open (that is, based on predetermined information). It is designed to flow into the induction flow path).
In this configuration, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability that an advantageous guidance flow path is selected as the guidance flow path through which the game ball passes. You may. Further, in this configuration, the game control device 100 may control the switching means instead of the effect control device 300. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the switching means may be operated (switching operation) when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 34.

Further, for example, on the stage portion 32S, a plurality of induction channels capable of guiding the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 (or the general winning opening 35) and the plurality of induction flows through which the game ball passes are introduced. A switching means (for example, an induction valve) for switching in the road may be provided to switch the induction flow path according to predetermined information (for example, a currently set probability setting value).
In this configuration, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability that an advantageous guidance flow path is selected as the guidance flow path through which the game ball passes. You may. Further, in this configuration, the game control device 100 may control the switching means instead of the effect control device 300.

Further, for example, a plurality of guidance flow paths capable of guiding the game ball to a specific region (for example, V region) and a guidance flow path through which the game ball passes are switched in the plurality of guidance flow paths in the large winning opening. A switching means (for example, an induction valve) may be provided to switch the induction flow path according to predetermined information (for example, a currently set probability setting value).
In this configuration, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability that an advantageous guidance flow path is selected as the guidance flow path through which the game ball passes. You may. Further, in this configuration, the game control device 100 may control the switching means instead of the effect control device 300.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special gaming state is obtained. In a gaming machine capable of generating A setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one probability setting value from a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value used for a lottery of a variable display game is assigned is provided, and depending on the result mode of a specific game. It is possible to suggest a probability setting value (currently set probability setting value) set by the setting means. Specifically, in the case of this modification, the result aspect of the specific game is "the selected out-ball passage path is a" left-side rotation-free flow path "" and "the selected out-ball passage is". It is either "the right side flow path" or "the selected out-ball passage flow path is the" left side rotation flow path "".
Therefore, as a game different from the variable display game, a specific game that can suggest the currently set probability setting value can be played, so that the interest of the game different from the variable display game can be enhanced.
The information that can be suggested by a game different from the variable display game is not limited to the currently set probability setting value and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, a jackpot history.

<Modification example of specific game>
The specific game different from the variable display game is not limited to the game played in the out zone unit (for example, the game which is the selected out ball passage path), and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the specific game different from the variable display game may be, for example, a game executed with a pseudo winning as an opportunity.
An example of a game to be executed with a pseudo-winning opportunity is a roulette effect.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a (or may be the pseudo winning opening 870 or the pseudo winning opening 900a), a plurality of character images are displayed. The roulette effect in which the included roulette image is rotated and the roulette image is stopped at a predetermined timing may be executed.
At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the currently set probability setting value may be suggested depending on the result mode of the roulette effect. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 95 (b), the player is currently set when the first character stops at the position of the arrow (or when the first character is most likely to stop at the position of the arrow). It can be inferred that the probability setting value is "1" or "2", and when the second character stops at the position of the arrow (or when the second character is most likely to stop at the position of the arrow). Can be inferred that the currently set probability setting value is "3" or "4", and when the third character stops at the position of the arrow (or the third character is the most at the position of the arrow). If it is easy to stop), it can be estimated that the currently set probability setting value is "5" or "6". For example, in the roulette effect shown in FIG. 95 (a), since the second character is stopped at the position of the arrow as a result of the roulette effect, the currently set probability setting value is "3" or "4". It suggests that.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present modification, when the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, it is special. In a game machine capable of generating a game state, a specific game execution means (effect control device 300) that executes a specific game (for example, roulette effect) different from the variable display game and a probability value used for lottery of the variable display game are assigned. A setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one of the plurality of probability setting values, and a probability setting value set by the setting means according to the result mode of the specific game (game control device 100). It is possible to suggest the currently set probability setting value). Specifically, in the case of this modification, the result mode of the specific game is one of "stop at the first character", "stop at the second character", and "stop at the third character".
Therefore, as a game different from the variable display game (a game triggered by a pseudo winning), a specific game that can suggest the currently set probability setting value can be played, so that the game is different from the variable display game. Can be enhanced.

Information that can be suggested by a game different from the variable display game (a game triggered by a pseudo winning) is not limited to the currently set probability setting value and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a jackpot history or a predetermined expectation It may be a degree (expectation of big hit, expectation of reach occurrence, etc.).
Further, the specific game (game triggered by the pseudo winning) different from the variable display game is not limited to the roulette effect, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the wake of the pseudo winning, for example, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (d), that is, a specific image (for example, a character image of "?" Or a character image of "!") Is displayed. You can do it.

<Modification example D of game board>
A modified example D of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 96.
FIG. 96 is a view for explaining a main part of the game board 30 of this modified example, and is a perspective view seen from the front side.
The game board 30 of this modified example includes an out zone unit 1100 capable of flowing in a game ball that has won a prize in a predetermined winning area (in the case of this modified example, the general winning opening 35), and the out zone is a highly expected effect. It differs from the game board 30 of the above-described embodiment and the above-described modified example in that a specific game (game ball effect) is executed in the unit 1100.

As shown in FIG. 96, for example, the game board 30 of this modification is provided on the left side of the center case 40 (not shown in FIG. 96) and faces the left region (left game region) of the center case 40. An out-zone unit 1100 that is provided on the left end portion of the stage portion 32S and overlaps the display portion of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction, and is adjacent to the display portion of the display device 41. It is equipped with a 7-segment display device 1200. In the following description of this modification, the general winning opening 35 provided on the left side of the center case 40, that is, the general winning opening 35 shown in FIG. 96 is simply referred to as the general winning opening 35.

The out zone unit 1100 includes a unit main body portion 1110 in which a specific game (game ball production) is performed internally, and a guide flow path portion 1120 that guides the game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 35 to the unit main body portion 1110. It is composed of.
The unit main body 1110 includes a cover member 1111 that covers a specific game space for playing a specific game (game ball effect), an opening / closing member 1112 that opens and closes a ball introduction port 1111a provided in the cover member 1111, and a specific game space. The ball rolling member 1113 forming the bottom surface and the pedestal portion 1115 into which the game ball that has passed through the left hole 1114L and the right hole 1114R provided in the ball rolling member 1113 flows in are provided.
In this modification, the cover member 1111 and the guide flow path portion 1120 are made of a transparent material, but at least the cover member 1111 may be made of a transparent material. That is, in the out zone unit 1100, the guide flow path portion 1120 may be made of an opaque material, as long as at least the inside of the specific game space is visible to the player.

The guide flow path portion 1120 is composed of a tubular member having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow down in a row. A first effect switch 1121 for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the guidance flow path portion 1120 is provided in the upstream portion of the guidance flow path portion 1120. Therefore, in this modification, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by both the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3) and the first effect switch 1121. The detection signal of the first effect switch 1121 is configured to be output to the effect control device 300, whereby the effect control device 300 can grasp that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 35. ing.
Further, in the effect control device 300, when the output of the detection signal from the first effect switch 1121 is not interrupted for a certain period or more, the number of game balls stored in the induction flow path portion 1120 exceeds the allowable number. A part of the game balls stored in the induction flow path portion 1120 is discharged to the ball discharge unit through the ball discharge port (not shown) provided in the guidance flow path portion 1120. It is configured to perform discharge processing. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game ball cannot flow into the general winning opening 35 due to the induction flow path portion 1120 overflowing with the game ball.

The downstream end of the induction flow path portion 1120 is connected to the ball introduction port 1111a of the unit main body portion 1110. The effect control device 300 controls a drive device (not shown) that drives the opening / closing member 1112 that opens / closes the ball introduction port 1111a, and closes the opening / closing member 1112 at a specific game start timing (shown in FIG. 96A). The state) is changed to the open state (the state shown in FIG. 96B), and the opening / closing member 1112 is returned to the closed state when a predetermined opening time elapses. The predetermined opening time, that is, the time when the opening / closing member 1112 is in the open state is set to, for example, the time required for one game ball to pass through the ball introduction port 1111a, whereby the unit main body is set. A plurality of game balls are not accommodated in the unit 1110 (in the specific game space) at the same time. That is, the number of game balls used in the specific game is always one.

The game ball introduced in the unit main body 1110 (in the specific game space) rolls on the ball rolling member 1113, which is a so-called crune, and the left hole 1114L and the right hole provided in the ball rolling member 1113. It passes through one of the 1114Rs, flows into the pedestal portion 1115, and is discharged to the ball discharge unit.
Inside the pedestal portion 1115, there is a second effect switch (not shown) that detects a game ball that has passed through the left hole 1114L, and a third effect switch (not shown) that detects a game ball that has passed through the right hole 1114R. And are arranged. The detection signal of the second effect switch and the detection signal of the third effect switch are configured to be output to the effect control device 300, whereby the effect control device 300 is introduced into the unit main body 1110. It is possible to grasp whether the game ball has flowed into the left hole 1114L or the right hole 1114R.

Further, among the side surfaces of the pedestal portion 1115, the side surface portion corresponding to the left hole 1114L is decorated corresponding to the left hole 1114L, and the side surface portion corresponding to the right hole 1114R corresponds to the right hole 1114R. The decoration is given. In the case of this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 96, the side surface portion corresponding to the left hole 1114L is decorated with the character image "SP" as the decoration corresponding to the left hole 1114L, and the right hole is provided. Since the side surface portion corresponding to the 1114R is decorated with the character image "Geki" as the decoration corresponding to the right hole 1114R, the game ball flows into the left hole 1114L, suggesting the occurrence of SP reach. It can be suggested that the jackpot expectation is high because the game ball flows into the right hole 1114R.

Whether the game machine 10 of the present modification, that is, the game machine 10 provided with the game board 30 of the modification D, flows into the left hole 1114L or the right hole 1114R as a specific game (game ball production). It is possible to execute the real ball notification effect. Further, before the actual ball notification effect is executed, the distribution display effect can be executed as a display effect as to whether or not the actual ball notification effect is executed.
FIGS. 97 to 99 show an example of the distribution display effect and the actual ball notification effect.
During the period in which the actual ball notification effect can be executed, the display device 41 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 97A, a decorative special figure variable display game display unit 41a for displaying the decorative special figure variable display game, and an undigested display device 41. Standing hold display unit 41b for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (first start memory or second start memory), and the start memory during digestion (of the currently running special figure variation display game). The decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory) is displayed on the pending display unit 41c, and the digested start memory (the special figure change display game executed before the currently running special figure change display game). An executed hold display unit 41f for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the above is provided, and an image imitating a game ball is displayed as the decorative special figure start memory display. Further, the display device 41 displays a crune image G51 imitating a crune and a sorting member image G52 imitating a sorting member. In FIGS. 97 to 99, the variation display unit 41d for small symbols and the number holding display unit 41e are not shown.

When the special figure variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 starts the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. At that time, when the decorative special figure start memory display is displayed on the executing hold display unit 41c, one decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the executed hold display unit 41f disappears and the execution is in progress. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the hold display unit 41c moves to the executed hold display unit 41f.
Further, in the effect control device 300, when the special figure variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display (hereinafter referred to as “variable hold display”) G50 corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game is on the left side (out). The distribution display effect of whether to distribute to the zone unit 1100 side) or to the right side (execution hold display unit 41c side) is started.

Specifically, in the distribution display effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the changing hold display G50 moves from the waiting hold display unit 41b to the crune image G51 and rolls on the crune image G51. It moves, passes through a hole provided in the center of the crune image G51, flows down to the distribution member image G52 displayed below the crune image G51, and flows down to the left side (out zone) by the distribution member image G52. It is distributed to the unit 1100 side) or the right side (execution hold display unit 41c side). In this way, during the period in which the actual ball notification effect can be executed, the distribution display effect is performed each time the special figure variation display game is started.

Here, the effect control device 300 performs, for example, a real ball notification effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the actual ball notification effect in the special figure variation display game. This real ball notification effect lottery may be performed before the start of the special figure variation display game, specifically, for example, in the look-ahead variation command process (FIG. 85) for the special figure variation display game. At the start of the special figure variation display game, specifically, for example, it may be performed in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 77) of the variation system command process for the special figure variation display game.

In this modification, the actual ball notification in the special figure variation display game is performed only when the reach effect of SP reach or higher (that is, SP1 reach, SP2 reach, SP3 reach, premier reach) is executed in the special figure variation display game. The production can be executed.
That is, when the reach effect equal to or higher than the SP reach is not executed in the special figure variation display game, the winning probability of the actual ball notification effect lottery is 0%. Alternatively, if the reach effect equal to or higher than the SP reach is not executed in the special figure variation display game, the actual ball notification effect lottery is not performed. Since the actual ball notification effect is executed only when the actual ball notification effect lottery is performed and the actual ball notification effect lottery is won, the actual ball notification effect is not executed if the actual ball notification effect lottery is not performed. ..
Therefore, by executing the actual ball notification effect during the special figure variation display game (that is, by converting the opening / closing member 1112 to the open state and introducing the game ball into the specific game space), the special figure variation display game Since it can be suggested that a reach effect equal to or higher than the SP reach is executed in the above, it can be said that the actual ball notification effect is an effect with a high degree of expectation.

Further, in this modified example, the actual ball notification effect can be executed in the special figure variation display game only when the game ball is stored in the guidance flow path portion 1120 at the start of the special figure variation display game. There is.
That is, if the game balls are not stored in the guidance flow path portion 1120 at the start of the special figure variation display game, the actual ball notification effect lottery is not performed. Alternatively, if the game ball is not stored in the guidance flow path portion 1120 at the start of the special figure variation display game, the actual ball notification effect is not executed even if the actual ball notification effect lottery is won. There is.
Whether or not the game balls are stored in the induction flow path portion 1120 is determined by, for example, the number of game balls winning in the general winning opening 35 (that is, the number of detections of the first effect switch 1121) and the opening / closing member 1112. Based on the number of conversions to the open state and the number of game balls discharged to the ball discharge unit through the ball discharge port (not shown) provided in the induction flow path portion 1120 (for example, the number of times the discharge process is executed). Can be determined.

The effect control device 300 performs a real ball notification effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the actual ball notification effect in the special figure variation display game, and when the actual ball notification effect lottery is won (execution of the actual ball notification effect is performed). (If determined), during the special figure variation display game, a distribution display effect of an effect mode in which the changing hold display G50 is distributed to the out zone unit 1100 side is executed, and then a real ball notification effect is executed. (That is, the opening / closing member 1112 is converted to the open state). In the distribution display effect of the effect mode in which the variable display G50 is distributed to the out zone unit 1100 side, the distribution member image G52 changes from the default state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 97B) to the variable display hold display. The state changes to a state in which the G50 is distributed to the left side (out zone unit 1100 side) (for example, the state shown in FIG. 97 (c)). As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (c), the variable pending display G50 is distributed to the out zone unit 1100 side.

On the other hand, when the actual ball notification effect lottery is lost (when it is decided not to execute the actual ball notification effect), the changing hold display G50 is being executed during the special figure variation display game. The distribution display effect of the effect mode of distributing to the side is executed, and then the actual ball notification effect is not executed (that is, the opening / closing member 1112 is not converted to the open state). In the distribution display effect of the effect mode in which the variable display G50 is distributed to the execution hold display unit 41c side, the distribution member image G52 is changing from the default state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 97B). The hold display G50 changes to a state of being distributed to the right side (execution hold display unit 41c side) (for example, the state shown in FIG. 97 (d)). As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (d), the variable pending display G50 is distributed to the executing pending display unit 41c.
As an effect mode for distributing the changing hold display G50 to the executing hold display unit 41c side, the effect mode shown in FIG. 97 (d) (that is, the changing hold display G50 that has passed through the hole portion of the crune image G51 is shaken. Not only the effect mode of distributing to the execution hold display unit 41c side by the distribution member image G52), for example, the changing hold display G50 spills from the edge of the crune image G51 and is directly executed without passing through the distribution member image G52. An effect mode that fits within the middle hold display unit 41c may also be selectable.

Then, when the distribution display effect of the effect mode of distributing the changing hold display G50 to the out zone unit 1100 side is executed, that is, the changing hold display G50 is distributed to the out zone unit 1100 side in the distribution display effect. In this case, as shown in FIG. 98A, for example, the effect control device 300 starts the actual ball notification effect when the variable hold display G50 reaches a position where it overlaps with the specific game space of the out zone unit 1100. do. That is, the timing at which the variable pending display G50 reaches a position where it overlaps the specific game space before and after is the specific game start timing.
When the actual ball notification effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the changing hold display G50 is erased, and the opening / closing member 1112 of the out zone unit 1100 is converted into an open state to guide the flow path portion 1120. Since the game balls stored in the game balls (that is, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 35) are introduced into the unit main body 1110 (in the specific game space), the player is changing in the specific game space. It can be made to appear as if the hold display G50 is converted into a real ball (actual game ball).

Then, when the game ball flows into the left hole 1114L in the actual ball notification effect, the effect control device 300 generates SP reach as an effect corresponding to the left hole 1114L, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (c). The effect of displaying the cut-in image G53 suggesting is executed.
Further, when the game ball flows into the right hole 1114R in the actual ball notification effect, the effect control device 300 has a jackpot expectation degree as an effect corresponding to the right hole 1114R, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (d). An effect of displaying the cut-in image G54 suggesting that the image is high is executed.
In the case of this modification, the effect corresponding to the left hole 1114L and the effect corresponding to the right hole 1114R are at the time of switching from the N reach effect to the reach effect of SP reach or higher (if the N reach effect is not passed, before the reach). Since it is executed at the time of switching from the production to the reach production of SP reach or higher), it is suggested that the reach production of SP reach or higher is started by the production corresponding to the left hole 1114L or the production corresponding to the right hole 1114R. Can be done.

When the effect control device 300 loses the actual ball notification effect lottery, for example, after the variable hold display G50 reaches the executing hold display unit 41c, the executing hold display unit 41c and the executed hold display unit 41c and the executed hold display unit 300. A revival effect may be executed in which any one of the plurality of decorative special figure start memory displays displayed on the unit 41f is moved to the out zone unit 1100 side.
Specifically, for example, when the effect control device 300 performs a real ball notification effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the actual ball notification effect in the special figure variation display game, and loses the actual ball notification effect lottery. , A resurrection effect lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to execute the resurrection effect in the special figure variation display game. Then, when the revival effect lottery is won (when the execution of the revival effect is decided), the revival effect is executed during the special figure variation display game, and first, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a). , The character image G55 that carries the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the executing hold display unit 41c (or the executed hold display unit 41f) to the out zone unit 1100 side is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99B, for example, when the decorative special figure start memory display carried by the character image G55 reaches a position where it overlaps with the specific game space of the out zone unit 1100, the effect control device 300 reaches the actual ball. Start the notification effect. That is, the timing at which the decorative special figure start memory display carried by the character image G55 reaches a position where it overlaps with the specific game space in the front-rear direction is the specific game start timing.
When the actual ball notification effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), the character image G55 and the decorative special figure start memory display carried by the character image G55 are erased, and the opening / closing member 1112 of the out zone unit 1100 is deleted. Since the game ball converted into the open state and stored in the induction flow path portion 1120 (that is, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 35) is introduced into the unit main body portion 1110 (in the specific game space). It is possible to make the player appear as if the decorative special figure start memory display carried by the character image G55 is converted into a real ball (actual game ball) in the specific game space.
However, the revival effect can be executed in the special figure variation display game only when the game ball is stored in the guidance flow path portion 1120 at the start of the special figure variation display game.

Further, when the effect control device 300 loses the actual ball notification effect lottery, for example, after the variable hold display G50 reaches the executing hold display unit 41c, the executing hold display unit 41c and the executed hold display unit 41c and the executed hold display unit 300. What is the default display mode (for example, color) from the default display mode (for example, the color imitating a game ball (silver)) among the plurality of decorative special figure start memory displays displayed on the unit 41f? A hold change effect that changes to a different display mode (for example, blue, green, or red) may be executed.
Further, both the hold change effect and the resurrection effect may be executed. In that case, for example, the winning probability of the hold change effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the hold change effect is lost to the resurrection effect lottery. By making the difference between the case where the revival effect is performed and the case where the revival effect lottery is won, it is possible to suggest the high or low probability that the revival effect will be executed by the hold change effect. Further, for example, the degree of expectation may be increased in the order of blue <green <red, and the degree of expectation that the revival effect is executed may be suggested depending on the display mode after the change.

Further, even if the revival effect is executed, there may be a case where the decorative special figure start memory display carried by the character image G55 does not reach a position overlapping the specific game space in the front-rear direction (when the revival effect fails). In that case, the actual ball notification effect is not executed.
Further, the revival effect is not limited to the effect shown in FIG. 99 and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as a revival effect, for example, an effect of displaying a character image that carries the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the executing hold display unit 41c (or the executed hold display unit 41f) to the crune image G51 is displayed. It may be executed, and when the decorative special figure start memory display carried by the character image reaches the crune image G51, the distribution display effect may be executed again.

Further, the effect corresponding to the left hole 1114L is not limited to the effect shown in FIGS. 98 (c) and 99 (d), and can be appropriately changed. Further, the effect corresponding to the right hole 1114R is not limited to the effect shown in FIGS. 98 (d) and 99 (e), and can be appropriately changed. For example, either the effect corresponding to the left hole 1114L or the effect corresponding to the right hole 1114R may be an effect suggesting a currently set probability setting value.
Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the changing hold display G50 distributed to the out zone unit 1100 side in the distribution display effect, or the decorative special figure start memory carried by the character image G55 in the revival effect. The actual ball notification effect is executed when the display reaches a position that overlaps the specific game space in the front-rear direction, but the execution trigger of the actual ball notification effect is not limited to these and can be changed as appropriate.

100 and 101 show a modified example of the execution trigger of the actual ball notification effect.
For example, as shown in FIG. 100, instead of the distribution display effect, a 7-segment variation effect of whether or not the 7-segment display device 1200 stops at a predetermined symbol (for example, "7") is executed, and the 7-segment variation is performed. In the effect, the actual ball notification effect may be executed when the 7-segment display device 1200 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (for example, "7").
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 100A and 100B, for example, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the effect control device 300 starts the 7-segment variable effect and starts the general winning opening 35. The 7-segment display device 1200 provided on the right side of the 35 displays the symbol in a variable manner.

Then, if there is a specific special figure variation display game (for example, the special figure variation display game won in the actual ball notification effect lottery) among the undigested special figure variation display games, for example, FIG. 100 (c), As shown in (d), the 7-segment variation effect is controlled so that a predetermined symbol (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed during the execution of the specific special figure variation display game, and the 7-segment display device 1200 is predetermined. When the symbol (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed, the actual ball notification effect is started. That is, the timing when the 7-segment display device 1200 stops at a predetermined symbol (for example, "7") is the specific game start timing. When a predetermined symbol (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display device 1200, the position where the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running hold display unit 41c overlaps the specific game space before and after. In that case, the player may see the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running hold display unit 41c as a real ball (actual) in the specific game space. It can be made to look as if it was converted into a game ball).
On the other hand, if there is no specific special figure variation display game (for example, the special figure variation display game that won the real ball notification production lottery) in the undigested special figure variation display game, for example, the specific special figure By the end of the variable display game, the 7-segment display device 1200 is stopped and displayed with a symbol other than a predetermined symbol (for example, "7"), and the actual ball notification effect is not executed.

When the real ball notification effect is executed when the 7-segment display device 1200 stops at a predetermined symbol (for example, "7"), the special figure variation display game executed at the start of the 7-segment variation effect If it is possible to execute a reach effect of SP reach or higher and there is time left to execute the actual ball notification effect in the special figure variation display game, 7 segments are executed during the execution of the special figure variation display game. A predetermined symbol (for example, "7") may be stopped and displayed on the display device 1200 to execute the actual ball notification effect.
Further, when the actual ball notification effect is executed when the 7-segment display device 1200 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (for example, "7"), the revival effect can be executed. As a revival effect in this case, for example, after a symbol other than a predetermined symbol (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display device 1200, the character image displayed on the display device 41 is displayed on the 7-segment display device. By emitting a beam toward 1200, the 7-segment display device 1200 can be re-variated and a predetermined symbol (for example, "7") can be stopped and displayed.

Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 101, instead of the distribution display effect, a cumulative game is executed on the display device 41 or the like, and the actual ball notification effect is executed when a predetermined condition is achieved in the cumulative game. Is also good.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), for example, the effect control device 300 performs an effect of increasing or decreasing the meter value of the meter image G56 at a predetermined timing as a cumulative game.

Then, if there is a specific special figure variation display game (for example, a special figure variation display game won in the actual ball notification effect lottery) among the undigested special figure variation display games, for example, FIG. 101 (b), As shown in (c), the cumulative game is controlled so that the meter value of the meter image G56 reaches a predetermined threshold value during the execution of the specific special figure variation display game, and the meter value of the meter image G56 reaches a predetermined threshold value. When it reaches, the real ball notification effect is started. That is, the timing at which the meter value of the meter image G56 reaches a predetermined threshold value (the timing at which the predetermined condition is achieved in the cumulative game) is the specific game start timing. When the meter value of the meter image G56 reaches a predetermined threshold value, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the execution hold display unit 41c moves to a position where it overlaps the specific game space in the front-rear direction. You may go, and in that case, whether the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running hold display unit 41c has been converted into a real ball (actual game ball) in the specific game space. Can be made to look like.
Further, the cumulative game is not limited to the effect of increasing or decreasing the meter value of the meter image G56 at a predetermined timing, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the cumulative game may be an effect of increasing or decreasing the point value of the point image at a predetermined timing. ..

Here, when the actual ball notification effect is performed at the execution triggers shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the execution hold display unit 41c displays a decorative start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game that has been rejected in the actual ball notification effect lottery. Only is displayed, and the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure variation display game that won the actual ball notification effect lottery is not displayed. The hold display unit 41c contains not only the decoration start memory display corresponding to the special figure variation display game that was rejected in the actual ball notification effect lottery, but also the decoration start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game that was won in the actual ball notification effect lottery. The display is also displayed.

Further, in the distribution display effect, the area where the crune image G51 is displayed is an area for displaying information about the start memory during digestion (starting memory corresponding to the currently executing special figure variation display game), that is, during execution. It may be treated as a hold display unit 41c. In this case, in the distribution display effect, the fluctuating hold display G50 moves from the waiting hold display unit 41b to the executing hold display unit 41c (Clune image G51) and is distributed to the left side (out zone unit 1100 side). It is produced whether it is distributed to the right side (executed hold display unit 41f side).

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present modification, the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the special game In a game machine capable of generating a state, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling an effect related to a variable display game, a predetermined winning area (in the case of this modification, a general winning opening 35), and a predetermined winning area. A specific game (actual ball notification effect) is executed using the inflow area (unit main body 1110) in which the winning game balls can flow in, and the game balls that have won in the predetermined winning area in the inflow area. It is possible to suggest predetermined information (in the case of this modification, the occurrence of SP reach and the high degree of expectation of a big hit) from the result of the specific game, and the effect control means determines whether or not the execution condition of the specific game is satisfied. Display effects ((1) distribution display effects, (2) 7-segment variable effects, (3) cumulative games) can be executed, and when the execution conditions for a specific game are met in the display effects ((1) pending change) When the display G50 reaches a position where it overlaps the specific game space in the front-rear direction, (2) when the 7-segment display device 1200 stops at a predetermined symbol (for example, "7"), (3) the predetermined condition is achieved in the cumulative game. In the case), a game ball that has won a prize in a predetermined winning area is introduced into the inflow area, and a specific game is executed using the introduced game ball.

Therefore, the game ball can be used to execute a specific game (actual ball notification effect) linked to the display effect, and predetermined information can be suggested by the result of the specific game. That is, as the effect using the game ball, the effect linked to the display effect and suggesting the predetermined information can be performed, so that the effect of the effect using the game ball can be enhanced.
In addition, the specific game (actual ball notification effect) is an effect using a game ball that has won a prize in a predetermined winning area, and is not an effect using a game ball that may win a prize in the winning area. You can maintain sex and fairness.
The predetermined winning area is not limited to the general winning opening 35 and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is provided with a determination means (game control device 100) for determining the variation display game before or at the start of the variation display game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means. (Effect control device 300) is determined during execution of a variation display game in which the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined result (in the case of this modification, a special figure variation display game in which a reach effect equal to or higher than SP reach is generated). A game ball that has won a prize in the winning area (in the case of this modification, the general winning opening 35) is introduced into the inflow area (unit main body 1110), and a specific game (actual ball notification effect) is executed using the introduced game ball. It can be configured to allow.
With this configuration, by executing a specific game (actual ball notification effect) while the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is being executed, the determination result related to the variable display game is a predetermined result. Since it can be suggested, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the game ball.
The variable display game in which the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined result is not limited to the special figure variable display game in which the reach effect of SP reach or higher is generated, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, in a variable display game in which the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined result, for example, a special figure variation display in which a predetermined effect (N reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.) other than the reach effect of SP reach or higher occurs. It may be a game, or it may be a special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) satisfies the execution condition of the specific game in the display effect ((1) distribution display effect, (2) 7-segment variation effect). If not, it is possible to execute a revival effect that satisfies the execution condition of the specific game, and if the execution condition of the specific game is satisfied in the revival effect, a predetermined winning area (in the case of this modification, the general winning opening 35). ) Can be introduced into the inflow region (unit main body 1110), and a specific game (actual ball notification effect) can be executed using the introduced game ball (see, for example, FIG. 99). ).
With this configuration, after the player is once discouraged by the display effect, the revival effect can enhance the interest.

Further, the game machine 10 of the present modification is provided with a start storage means (game control device 100) that stores the start memory that is the execution right of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , The effect control means (effect control device 300) displays an image imitating a game ball as a start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory (see FIGS. 97 to 99), and a variable display game. Is started, as a display effect, an effect (distribution display effect) is performed to determine whether or not the start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the variable display game moves to the inflow area side (out zone unit 1100 side). , When the start memory display moves to the inflow area side in the display effect, it is assumed that the execution condition of the specific game is satisfied, and the game ball that has won the prize in the predetermined winning area (in the case of this modification, the general winning opening 35) flows in. It can be introduced into the area (unit main body 1110) and configured to execute a specific game (actual ball notification effect) using the introduced game ball (see FIGS. 97 and 98).
With such a configuration, the display effect can increase the expectation for the execution of the specific game (actual ball notification effect), so that the interest of the effect using the game ball can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, the first display device (display device 41, special figure 1 display 51, special figure 2 display 52) on which the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is displayed, A second display device (7-segment display device 1200) different from the first display device is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) is placed in a predetermined winning area (general winning opening 35 in the case of this modification). When the game ball wins a prize, as a display effect, an effect of whether or not a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the second display device (7-segment variation effect) is performed, and the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in the display effect. In this case, assuming that the execution condition of the specific game is satisfied, the game ball that has won a prize in the predetermined winning area is introduced into the inflow area (unit main body 1110), and the specific game (actual ball notification effect) is used by using the introduced game ball. ) Can be configured to execute (see FIG. 100).
With such a configuration, the display effect can increase the expectation for the execution of the specific game (actual ball notification effect), so that the interest of the effect using the game ball can be enhanced.
The second display device is not limited to the 7-segment display device 1200 (7-segment type display device) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a liquid crystal display device or the like may be used.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as the gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.
For example, in the above-described modification B and C, the decoration special figure variation display game is executed by the main display device (segment display) 41a, and the effect or the like is executed by the sub display device 41b, but the reverse is also possible. Further, the main display device 41a may be a display device (liquid crystal display or the like) similar to the sub display device 41b.

10 Pachinko machine 35 General winning opening (predetermined winning area)
41 Display device (first display device)
51 Special Figure 1 Display (1st Display)
52 Special Figure 2 Display (1st Display)
100 Game control device (judgment means, start storage means)
300 Production control device (Production control means)
1110 Unit body (inflow area)
1200 7-segment display device (second display device)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result.
A display means having a display unit and
A flow-down area where a game ball located in front of the display unit can flow down is provided.
Wherein the display unit predetermined viewable of it through a falling region, have lower than a predetermined value visually capable of gaming balls of the falling region, display is difficult lightness viewing of a game ball of the falling region At the same time, a part of the predetermined display unit has a value higher than the predetermined value, lower than a specific value in which it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball in the flow area, and equal to or higher than the predetermined value. A gaming machine characterized by displaying the color of lightness. In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result.
A display means having a display unit and
A flow-down area where a game ball located in front of the display unit can flow down is provided.
A specific value or more that makes it difficult to visually recognize the game ball in the flow area, which is higher than a predetermined value in which the game ball in the flow area can be visually recognized on the predetermined display unit that can be visually recognized through the flow area. It performs the display of the brightness of a part of the predetermined display unit, a game machine, characterized by lower than the certain value, and displays the color of the predetermined value or more brightness.

Images